From 0b8ca6637be94f7814cafa7d01ad4699672ff336 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Darrell Anderson Date: Tue, 21 Jan 2014 22:06:48 -0600 Subject: Beautify docbook files --- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook | 266 ++----- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook | 43 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook | 455 +++-------- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook | 119 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook | 80 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook | 105 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook | 181 +---- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook | 209 ++--- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook | 278 ++----- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook | 140 +--- .../tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook | 214 ++--- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook | 234 +----- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook | 112 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook | 152 +--- .../tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook | 327 ++------ .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook | 483 +++--------- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook | 185 ++--- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook | 221 ++---- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook | 300 ++----- tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook | 865 +++++---------------- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook | 216 ++--- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook | 261 ++----- .../tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook | 106 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook | 213 ++--- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmlaunch/index.docbook | 76 +- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook | 136 +--- .../tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook | 126 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook | 342 ++------ .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook | 166 +--- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook | 91 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook | 250 ++---- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook | 181 +---- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook | 325 ++------ .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook | 363 ++------- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook | 110 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook | 334 ++------ .../tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook | 175 +---- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook | 92 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook | 205 ++--- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook | 76 +- .../tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook | 321 ++------ .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook | 138 +--- .../tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook | 107 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook | 389 +++------ .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook | 98 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook | 718 ++++------------- .../tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook | 97 +-- .../docs/tdebase/kcontrol/useragent/index.docbook | 156 +--- .../kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook | 634 ++++----------- 49 files changed, 2574 insertions(+), 8897 deletions(-) (limited to 'tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol') diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook index 7e2945de9fb..d6dc0909822 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/index.docbook @@ -3,292 +3,140 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; -&Jost.Schenck; +&Mike.McBride; +&Jost.Schenck; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-04-01 -3.2 +2003-04-01 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -sound server -sound -aRts +KDE +KControl +sound server +sound +aRts -Sound System +Sound System -This control module is used to configure the settings for the &arts; sound server (the &kde; sound server). +This control module is used to configure the settings for the &arts; sound server (the &kde; sound server). -&arts; +&arts; -The top option, labelled Start aRts soundserver on KDE startup, enables (or disables) the &arts; sound server. +The top option, labelled Start aRts soundserver on KDE startup, enables (or disables) the &arts; sound server. -You can find out more about &arts; in general by typing help:/artsbuilder into the &konqueror; location bar, or by finding the &arts-builder; documentation in &khelpcenter;. +You can find out more about &arts; in general by typing help:/artsbuilder into the &konqueror; location bar, or by finding the &arts-builder; documentation in &khelpcenter;. -The rest of the panel consists of options for the &arts; sound server. +The rest of the panel consists of options for the &arts; sound server. -Enable network transparency +Enable network transparency -If this option is enabled, then sound requests from the network will be honoured by the sound server. If this option is disabled, the sound server will only honour requests from the local computer. +If this option is enabled, then sound requests from the network will be honoured by the sound server. If this option is disabled, the sound server will only honour requests from the local computer. -Exchange security and reference info over the X11 server -If you have enabled network transparency, this option will allow the exchange of security and reference information. If in doubt, and you have enabled network transparency, this option should be checked. +Exchange security and reference info over the X11 server +If you have enabled network transparency, this option will allow the exchange of security and reference information. If in doubt, and you have enabled network transparency, this option should be checked. -Run soundserver with realtime priority -Enabling this option will give the sound server priority over other applications, which will help alleviate any problems delivering uninterrupted sound. -This option may require permissions you do not have as a regular user. -This option also relies on certain real time support from your system which may not be available. -If you do not have the necessary permissions, or your system does not have the real time support necessary, enabling this option will not cause problems. +Run soundserver with realtime priority +Enabling this option will give the sound server priority over other applications, which will help alleviate any problems delivering uninterrupted sound. +This option may require permissions you do not have as a regular user. +This option also relies on certain real time support from your system which may not be available. +If you do not have the necessary permissions, or your system does not have the real time support necessary, enabling this option will not cause problems. -Autosuspend if idle for: +Autosuspend if idle for: -Normally &arts; locks the sound card device, so that other applications cannot use it. If you enable this option, then if &arts; has been idle for the amount of time you set, it will suspend itself, allowing any application access to the sound hardware. If &arts; receives another request, it will unsuspend, and continue as normal. Enabling this option may cause a small delay when you start an &arts; application. +Normally &arts; locks the sound card device, so that other applications cannot use it. If you enable this option, then if &arts; has been idle for the amount of time you set, it will suspend itself, allowing any application access to the sound hardware. If &arts; receives another request, it will unsuspend, and continue as normal. Enabling this option may cause a small delay when you start an &arts; application. -Display messages using: +Display messages using: -The application that will be used to display messages from the &arts; server. The default is artsmessage and this should probably not be changed unless you have thoroughly read the &arts; documentation. +The application that will be used to display messages from the &arts; server. The default is artsmessage and this should probably not be changed unless you have thoroughly read the &arts; documentation. -Message Display +Message Display -You can select how detailed the messages are that &arts; displays to you. You can choose to see only error messages, debug messages that are useful to the developers (you probably only want that level if you are a developer, or one has asked you to set this). Or you can choose to see generally informational messages when &arts; is doing something such as suspending itself. +You can select how detailed the messages are that &arts; displays to you. You can choose to see only error messages, debug messages that are useful to the developers (you probably only want that level if you are a developer, or one has asked you to set this). Or you can choose to see generally informational messages when &arts; is doing something such as suspending itself. -At the bottom of this page is a button that allows you to Test Sound. +At the bottom of this page is a button that allows you to Test Sound. -Sound I/O +Sound I/O -I/O means Input and Output, and this panel allows you to configure how &kde; and &arts; interact with your sound hardware. +I/O means Input and Output, and this panel allows you to configure how &kde; and &arts; interact with your sound hardware. -The first option you can configure in the Sound I/O panel is the Sound I/O method:. It tells &arts; which sound system to use for input and output of sound. Current choices are ALSA (Advanced &Linux; Sound Architecture), OSS (Open Sound System), ESD (Enlightenment Sound Daemon), no audio at all and autodetect. In most cases Autodetect will be perfect for you. +The first option you can configure in the Sound I/O panel is the Sound I/O method:. It tells &arts; which sound system to use for input and output of sound. Current choices are ALSA (Advanced &Linux; Sound Architecture), OSS (Open Sound System), ESD (Enlightenment Sound Daemon), no audio at all and autodetect. In most cases Autodetect will be perfect for you. -Other options are: +Other options are: -Enable full duplex operation -This option allows the sound server to play and record sound at the same time. This option should be enabled if you use applications (such as Internet telephones) which require simultaneous record and playback. +Enable full duplex operation +This option allows the sound server to play and record sound at the same time. This option should be enabled if you use applications (such as Internet telephones) which require simultaneous record and playback. -Use custom sound device: +Use custom sound device: -Normally, the sound server defaults to using the device called /dev/dsp for sound output. This should work in most cases. An exception is, for instance, if you are using devfs, then you should use /dev/sound/dsp instead. Other alternatives are things like /dev/dsp0 or /dev/dsp1 if you have a soundcard that supports multiple outputs or you have multiple soundcards. +Normally, the sound server defaults to using the device called /dev/dsp for sound output. This should work in most cases. An exception is, for instance, if you are using devfs, then you should use /dev/sound/dsp instead. Other alternatives are things like /dev/dsp0 or /dev/dsp1 if you have a soundcard that supports multiple outputs or you have multiple soundcards. -If you often use non-&arts; aware applications, and you have a soundcard that supports it, try setting &arts; to use a different device than /dev/dsp. This way, other applications will be able to use the default device, while &arts; is still running, without giving any error messages. +If you often use non-&arts; aware applications, and you have a soundcard that supports it, try setting &arts; to use a different device than /dev/dsp. This way, other applications will be able to use the default device, while &arts; is still running, without giving any error messages. -Use custom sampling rate: +Use custom sampling rate: -Normally, the sound server defaults to using a sampling rate of 44100 Hz (CD quality), which is supported on almost all hardware. If you are using certain Yamaha soundcards, you might need to configure this to 48000 Hz here; if you are using old SoundBlaster cards, like SoundBlaster Pro, you might need to change this to 22050 Hz. All other values are possible too and may make sense in certain contexts (&ie; professional studio equipment). +Normally, the sound server defaults to using a sampling rate of 44100 Hz (CD quality), which is supported on almost all hardware. If you are using certain Yamaha soundcards, you might need to configure this to 48000 Hz here; if you are using old SoundBlaster cards, like SoundBlaster Pro, you might need to change this to 22050 Hz. All other values are possible too and may make sense in certain contexts (&ie; professional studio equipment). -Other custom options: -There are some options offered by &arts; which may not be available in this control module, so you can add command line options here which will be passed directly to artsd. The options will be appended, so they will override the choices made in the GUI. To see the possible choices, open a &konsole; window, and type artsd . +Other custom options: +There are some options offered by &arts; which may not be available in this control module, so you can add command line options here which will be passed directly to artsd. The options will be appended, so they will override the choices made in the GUI. To see the possible choices, open a &konsole; window, and type artsd . -Sound quality: +Sound quality: -These settings allow you to configure the quality of the sounds that will be played. +These settings allow you to configure the quality of the sounds that will be played. -Note that a higher sound quality causes a higher CPU usage. -If you find sound is slow, or using too much CPU, try reducing this setting. +Note that a higher sound quality causes a higher CPU usage. +If you find sound is slow, or using too much CPU, try reducing this setting. -Audio Buffer Size (response time) -This slider determines how quickly the sound server can use your computer's resources. The faster the response time, the higher the CPU load will be. -I would recommend that you start with the sound server set at 250 ms, and use &kde; for a while. If you notice that the sound does not work correctly, increase the responsiveness one step at a time until the problems disappear. +Audio Buffer Size (response time) +This slider determines how quickly the sound server can use your computer's resources. The faster the response time, the higher the CPU load will be. +I would recommend that you start with the sound server set at 250 ms, and use &kde; for a while. If you notice that the sound does not work correctly, increase the responsiveness one step at a time until the problems disappear. @@ -297,13 +145,9 @@ -Mixer +Mixer -If you have installed the optional tdemultimedia package, a &kcontrol; panel allowing configuration of the mixer will also appear here. If installed, you can read about this in its own manual. +If you have installed the optional tdemultimedia package, a &kcontrol; panel allowing configuration of the mixer will also appear here. If installed, you can read about this in its own manual. &midi-kcontrol; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook index 5c2ae385ad5..b3e2fe90bce 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/arts/midi.docbook @@ -1,47 +1,16 @@ -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -<acronym ->MIDI</acronym -> Configuration +<acronym>MIDI</acronym> Configuration -This module is used to determine which MIDI device &kde; should use. You can also install a MIDI wrapper around the device if you want. +This module is used to determine which MIDI device &kde; should use. You can also install a MIDI wrapper around the device if you want. -The use of this module is simple. Click once on the MIDI device that you would like to use from the list. +The use of this module is simple. Click once on the MIDI device that you would like to use from the list. -If you want to use a MIDI mapper, simply mark the checkbox below the list labelled Use MIDI Mapper. This will allow you to select the map in the text box below. You can click on the folder icon to browse your filesystem to find the map if you need it. +If you want to use a MIDI mapper, simply mark the checkbox below the list labelled Use MIDI Mapper. This will allow you to select the map in the text box below. You can click on the folder icon to browse your filesystem to find the map if you need it. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook index 904bd97986e..92572b7a831 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/background/index.docbook @@ -2,179 +2,103 @@ - + ]>
-&Mark.Donohoe; -&Martin.R.Jones; - -&Mike.McBride; - -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mark.Donohoe; +&Martin.R.Jones; + +&Mike.McBride; + +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-28 -3.2 +2003-09-28 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -background -wallpaper +KDE +KControl +background +wallpaper -Background +Background -The Background module allows you to configure colours or wallpapers for your desktop background. +The Background module allows you to configure colours or wallpapers for your desktop background. -It is comprised of four areas: +It is comprised of four areas: -Desktop selection area +Desktop selection area -The background Preview Monitor +The background Preview Monitor -An area for determining the background colour +An area for determining the background colour -An area for selecting background images +An area for selecting background images -Selecting the desktop +Selecting the desktop -The drop down box labelled Setting for desktop: is used to select the desktop you want to configure. You can select any of the desktops individually, or you can select All Desktops and the changes you make will be applied to all desktops. +The drop down box labelled Setting for desktop: is used to select the desktop you want to configure. You can select any of the desktops individually, or you can select All Desktops and the changes you make will be applied to all desktops. -Preview Monitor +Preview Monitor -This is a preview window. It will give you a sense of what to expect with each change. +This is a preview window. It will give you a sense of what to expect with each change. - + -Background +Background -This section allows you to load a wallpaper on top of the colour gradient chosen in the section below. +This section allows you to load a wallpaper on top of the colour gradient chosen in the section below. -There are three choices available here: +There are three choices available here: -No Picture +No Picture -No picture background will be shown. The colour and pattern choices below will still take effect. +No picture background will be shown. The colour and pattern choices below will still take effect. -Picture +Picture -A single picture will be used as the background for the selected desktops. -How this picture is positioned and scaled can be fine tuned below. +A single picture will be used as the background for the selected desktops. +How this picture is positioned and scaled can be fine tuned below. -Slide show +Slide show -&kde; allows you to have an automatic slide show of wallpaper images. To enable this option, press the Setup... button. In the resulting dialogue you may choose any image or folder of images available on your computer, using the Add... button to navigate your file system. Remove will remove the currently selected entry from the list. - -You may choose the length of time any image is displayed in the Change picture after: box, and you may choose Show pictures in random order if you don't want them displayed in the order they are listed. - -Displaying wallpaper requires that the image be kept in memory. If you are low on memory, using a small, tiled image or none at all is recommended. - -Scaling or centreing a small image still requires an image the size of your display to be maintained in memory. +&kde; allows you to have an automatic slide show of wallpaper images. To enable this option, press the Setup... button. In the resulting dialogue you may choose any image or folder of images available on your computer, using the Add... button to navigate your file system. Remove will remove the currently selected entry from the list. + +You may choose the length of time any image is displayed in the Change picture after: box, and you may choose Show pictures in random order if you don't want them displayed in the order they are listed. + +Displaying wallpaper requires that the image be kept in memory. If you are low on memory, using a small, tiled image or none at all is recommended. + +Scaling or centreing a small image still requires an image the size of your display to be maintained in memory. @@ -182,192 +106,85 @@ -Options +Options - + -Centred -The image will be centred on the screen without changing the size of the image. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. +Centred +The image will be centred on the screen without changing the size of the image. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. -Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. +Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. -Centre Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upward, downward to the right, and to the left. - +Centre Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upward, downward to the right, and to the left. + -Centred Maxpect -The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. +Centred Maxpect +The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. -Tiled Maxpect +Tiled Maxpect -The image will be placed in the corner of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. If there is any space over, the image will be duplicated to fill it. +The image will be placed in the corner of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. If there is any space over, the image will be duplicated to fill it. -Scaled -The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit to all four corners. This may distort the image. +Scaled +The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit to all four corners. This may distort the image. -Centred Auto fit +Centred Auto fit -If the picture fits the desktop size, this mode works like the centred option. If the picture is larger than the desktop then it is scaled down to fit while keeping the aspect ratio. +If the picture fits the desktop size, this mode works like the centred option. If the picture is larger than the desktop then it is scaled down to fit while keeping the aspect ratio. - + -Colours: +Colours: -The first drop down box allows you to choose the type of colour, gradient, or pattern to display under (or in place of) wallpaper. -If you are going to be using a picture as a wallpaper, you can skip this section of the dialogue box. -However, if your chosen wallpaper does not cover the entire desktop, the chosen colours will still show in the remaining space. +The first drop down box allows you to choose the type of colour, gradient, or pattern to display under (or in place of) wallpaper. +If you are going to be using a picture as a wallpaper, you can skip this section of the dialogue box. +However, if your chosen wallpaper does not cover the entire desktop, the chosen colours will still show in the remaining space. -Single Colour -By choosing this mode, you select one colour using the first colour bar, and the entire background is covered with this one colour. +Single Colour +By choosing this mode, you select one colour using the first colour bar, and the entire background is covered with this one colour. -Horizontal Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. +Horizontal Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. -Vertical Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the bottom of the screen. +Vertical Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the bottom of the screen. -Pyramid Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the centre of the screen. +Pyramid Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the centre of the screen. -Pipecross Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different than the pyramid gradient. +Pipecross Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Primary Colour in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Blend Colour as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different than the pyramid gradient. -Elliptic Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Blend Colour in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Primary Colour as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. +Elliptic Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Blend Colour in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Primary Colour as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. -Pattern +Pattern -The rest of the list are the names of various patterns or textures you can choose. -Click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. - -Select the primary colour with the first colour bar. If you have chosen a pattern that requires two colours to be set the secondary colour can be set by pressing the appropriate button. +The rest of the list are the names of various patterns or textures you can choose. +Click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. + +Select the primary colour with the first colour bar. If you have chosen a pattern that requires two colours to be set the secondary colour can be set by pressing the appropriate button. @@ -378,33 +195,14 @@ -Blending: +Blending: -The drop down box labelled Blending: contains the options to make a smooth transition (blend) from the wallpaper as it changes to the background. +The drop down box labelled Blending: contains the options to make a smooth transition (blend) from the wallpaper as it changes to the background. -A drop down box allows you to select the blending mode. Many of the modes are similar to blending modes for background colours. Select your mode from the list, and the preview window shows you what it will look like. -The Balance slider adjusts the blending. The results can be seen in the preview window. -The Reverse roles can reverse the role of the picture and the background for some types of blending. +A drop down box allows you to select the blending mode. Many of the modes are similar to blending modes for background colours. Select your mode from the list, and the preview window shows you what it will look like. +The Balance slider adjusts the blending. The results can be seen in the preview window. +The Reverse roles can reverse the role of the picture and the background for some types of blending. @@ -415,70 +213,33 @@ -Advanced options -Located below the preview monitor is a button labeled Advanced Options.... - -To use an external program to determine and change the background of &kde;, simply select Use the following program for drawing the background. Available &kde; programs are listed, select one to enable it. To modify your choice, for example to change the refresh times, you may press the Modify... button. - -To add a third party application (⪚ XEarth you may use the Add... button. A dialogue will open allowing you to choose your application, and fill in other data about it. You may remove any entries from this list by selecting it and pressing the Remove button. - -Using third party external programs to modify or change the background is beyond the scope of this document, see their respective documentation for the format of command-line switches and other configuration information. - -Also in this section you may choose to set the colour of text that is used for icons on the desktop. If you find icon text difficult to read against a wallpaper or pattern, you can choose a solid colour to show beneath text, or enable a shadow under the text to enhance its appearance. - -Finally you can set the Size of the background cache:. The default (2048 KB) is usually a safe choice. +Advanced options +Located below the preview monitor is a button labeled Advanced Options.... + +To use an external program to determine and change the background of &kde;, simply select Use the following program for drawing the background. Available &kde; programs are listed, select one to enable it. To modify your choice, for example to change the refresh times, you may press the Modify... button. + +To add a third party application (⪚ XEarth you may use the Add... button. A dialogue will open allowing you to choose your application, and fill in other data about it. You may remove any entries from this list by selecting it and pressing the Remove button. + +Using third party external programs to modify or change the background is beyond the scope of this document, see their respective documentation for the format of command-line switches and other configuration information. + +Also in this section you may choose to set the colour of text that is used for icons on the desktop. If you find icon text difficult to read against a wallpaper or pattern, you can choose a solid colour to show beneath text, or enable a shadow under the text to enhance its appearance. + +Finally you can set the Size of the background cache:. The default (2048 KB) is usually a safe choice. -Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns - -A pattern is a picture file which &kde; uses as a template to draw your background. The picture file provides the shapes, but &kde; provides the colours. &kde; is packaged with several patterns, and you also can add new patterns. - -To add a new pattern that is available to every user on your computer, simply place the file in $TDEDIR/share/apps/kdesktop/patterns/ - -Copy a .desktop file from this folder, and name it the same as your new pattern image file. Modify the contents to suit your new pattern. - -To add a new pattern for a single user, add the files to $TDEHOME/share/apps/kdesktop/patterns/ - -For best results, the pattern should be a grayscale PNG file. +Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns + +A pattern is a picture file which &kde; uses as a template to draw your background. The picture file provides the shapes, but &kde; provides the colours. &kde; is packaged with several patterns, and you also can add new patterns. + +To add a new pattern that is available to every user on your computer, simply place the file in $TDEDIR/share/apps/kdesktop/patterns/ + +Copy a .desktop file from this folder, and name it the same as your new pattern image file. Modify the contents to suit your new pattern. + +To add a new pattern for a single user, add the files to $TDEHOME/share/apps/kdesktop/patterns/ + +For best results, the pattern should be a grayscale PNG file. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook index c2af7f9e516..e37c3ba5575 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/bell/index.docbook @@ -1,124 +1,53 @@ - + ]>
-Pat Dowler +Pat Dowler -Matthias Hoelzer +Matthias Hoelzer -Mike McBride +Mike McBride -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-16 -3.2 +2003-10-16 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -Bell -Settings +KDE +KControl +Bell +Settings -System bell +System bell -The system bell or beep is a feature of the X server, which attempts to make good use of the available hardware. +The system bell or beep is a feature of the X server, which attempts to make good use of the available hardware. -&kde; normally doesn't use the system bell; instead using its own system notifications, which could include log entries, message popups, or its own beep. You can configure these in the System Notifications &kcontrol; module. +&kde; normally doesn't use the system bell; instead using its own system notifications, which could include log entries, message popups, or its own beep. You can configure these in the System Notifications &kcontrol; module. -It isn't always possible for the X server to actually make a beep sound with exactly the parameters selected due to hardware limitations. For example, on most PCs, volume control is not very good so the X server seems to fake low volume with a reduced duration of the sound. Thus, if the settings don't seem to do anything, this is because the X server and/or the hardware don't support anything better. +It isn't always possible for the X server to actually make a beep sound with exactly the parameters selected due to hardware limitations. For example, on most PCs, volume control is not very good so the X server seems to fake low volume with a reduced duration of the sound. Thus, if the settings don't seem to do anything, this is because the X server and/or the hardware don't support anything better. -Users are able to set the following parameters for the bell: +Users are able to set the following parameters for the bell: - volume (percentage of maximum volume) - pitch (in Hz) - duration (in milliseconds) + volume (percentage of maximum volume) + pitch (in Hz) + duration (in milliseconds) -You can use the test button to hear how the current settings will sound. +You can use the test button to hear how the current settings will sound. -Section Authors -Pat Dowler, Matthias Hoelzer mhk@kde.org -Converted to KDE 2.0 by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Authors +Pat Dowler, Matthias Hoelzer mhk@kde.org +Converted to KDE 2.0 by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook index f0ec76562e9..6de5f958ac5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cache/index.docbook @@ -2,91 +2,45 @@ - + ]>
- + -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -Konqueror -Cache +KDE +KControl +Konqueror +Cache -Cache +Cache -This module allows you to control the size of the local cache folder used by &konqueror;. Note that each user account on your computer has a separate cache folder, and this folder is not shared with other web browsers such as &Netscape;. +This module allows you to control the size of the local cache folder used by &konqueror;. Note that each user account on your computer has a separate cache folder, and this folder is not shared with other web browsers such as &Netscape;. -Storing local copies of web pages that you have visited allows &konqueror; to quickly load their contents on subsequent visits. It will only be necessary to reload the contents from the original site if they have changed since your last visit, or if you click the reload button in &konqueror;. +Storing local copies of web pages that you have visited allows &konqueror; to quickly load their contents on subsequent visits. It will only be necessary to reload the contents from the original site if they have changed since your last visit, or if you click the reload button in &konqueror;. -If you really don't want any of the web pages you visit to be stored on your computer, you can disable &konqueror;'s disk cache by clearing the checkbox labelled Use cache. +If you really don't want any of the web pages you visit to be stored on your computer, you can disable &konqueror;'s disk cache by clearing the checkbox labelled Use cache. -You can set here how aggressively &konqueror; keeps the cache up to date. Keep cache in sync means that &konqueror; will hit the cache for all objects, downloading them if they are not there, and then display the item from the cache. Use cache whenever possible means that &konqueror; will try the cache, and if an object is not there, it will directly download it for display. Offline browsing mode means that &konqueror; will try the cache, and if an object is not there, it will not attempt to download it from the Internet. +You can set here how aggressively &konqueror; keeps the cache up to date. Keep cache in sync means that &konqueror; will hit the cache for all objects, downloading them if they are not there, and then display the item from the cache. Use cache whenever possible means that &konqueror; will try the cache, and if an object is not there, it will directly download it for display. Offline browsing mode means that &konqueror; will try the cache, and if an object is not there, it will not attempt to download it from the Internet. -You can control the size of the cache by typing a number into the text box labelled Disk cache size. This is the average amount of space in kilobytes that the cache folder is allowed to use. When the cache grows too large, &konqueror; will delete older files to reduce the size of the cache folder. +You can control the size of the cache by typing a number into the text box labelled Disk cache size. This is the average amount of space in kilobytes that the cache folder is allowed to use. When the cache grows too large, &konqueror; will delete older files to reduce the size of the cache folder. -This is however, only an average, and during a browsing session the cache could become substantially larger. +This is however, only an average, and during a browsing session the cache could become substantially larger. -You can use the Clear Cache button to empty the cache at any time. +You can use the Clear Cache button to empty the cache at any time.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook index 9945e689c16..ba049c4068e 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/clock/index.docbook @@ -2,104 +2,53 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-19 -3.2 +2003-10-19 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -clock -date -time -set -configure +KDE +KControl +clock +date +time +set +configure -Date & Time +Date & Time -You can use this module to alter the system date and time, using a convenient graphical interface. +You can use this module to alter the system date and time, using a convenient graphical interface. -You must have system administrator (root) access to change the system date and time. If you do not have this access level, this module will only show you the current settings. +You must have system administrator (root) access to change the system date and time. If you do not have this access level, this module will only show you the current settings. -When you first start, you are in display mode only. To modify your settings, click on Administrator Mode. If you are logged in as root, you will go straight to the change dialogue. If not, &kde; will ask for a superuser password. +When you first start, you are in display mode only. To modify your settings, click on Administrator Mode. If you are logged in as root, you will go straight to the change dialogue. If not, &kde; will ask for a superuser password. -Modifying your settings - -You set the date using the left half of the module. Simply choose your month (the drop down box at the top), year (the spin box at the top), and the day of the month (simply click on the day in the calendar). - -You set the time using the spin boxes at the bottom of the clock. You can also directly enter your value. - -The time is represented in 24 hour format. If you want the system time to be set to 8:00 PM, you need to set the hour spinbox to 20 (8 + 12). If you want the system time set to 8:00 AM, you should set the hour spinbox to 8. - -To set a new time zone, simply select one from the drop down box at the bottom. - -When you have set the correct date and time, simply click Apply to make the changes permanent. +Modifying your settings + +You set the date using the left half of the module. Simply choose your month (the drop down box at the top), year (the spin box at the top), and the day of the month (simply click on the day in the calendar). + +You set the time using the spin boxes at the bottom of the clock. You can also directly enter your value. + +The time is represented in 24 hour format. If you want the system time to be set to 8:00 PM, you need to set the hour spinbox to 20 (8 + 12). If you want the system time set to 8:00 AM, you should set the hour spinbox to 8. + +To set a new time zone, simply select one from the drop down box at the bottom. + +When you have set the correct date and time, simply click Apply to make the changes permanent. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook index 9309da02b22..a4af7121ec2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/colors/index.docbook @@ -2,187 +2,92 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Mark.Donohoe; &Mark.Donohoe.mail; -&Martin.R.Jones; &Martin.R.Jones.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Mark.Donohoe; &Mark.Donohoe.mail; +&Martin.R.Jones; &Martin.R.Jones.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -colour +KDE +KControl +colour -Colours +Colours -Introduction +Introduction -The Colour Selection module is comprised of 4 sections: +The Colour Selection module is comprised of 4 sections: -The colour scheme preview. -The current Widget Colour. +The colour scheme preview. +The current Widget Colour. -The available Colour Schemes. -The contrast slider. +The available Colour Schemes. +The contrast slider. -A Widget is a commonly-used programmer's term for referring to User Interface elements such as buttons, menus, and scroll bars. You can think of them as the fundamental pieces that are assembled to make your application. +A Widget is a commonly-used programmer's term for referring to User Interface elements such as buttons, menus, and scroll bars. You can think of them as the fundamental pieces that are assembled to make your application. -Preview +Preview -This section of the dialogue demonstrates how a colour scheme applies to a sample selection of widgets. It provides you with a preview of your current colour choices. +This section of the dialogue demonstrates how a colour scheme applies to a sample selection of widgets. It provides you with a preview of your current colour choices. -A colour scheme consists of a set of 18 colours. +A colour scheme consists of a set of 18 colours. -Each of the widgets is labelled to help you identify how your changes will impact the colour scheme. +Each of the widgets is labelled to help you identify how your changes will impact the colour scheme. -<guilabel ->Widget Colour</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Widget Colour</guilabel> -The currently selected member of the colour scheme is shown in the combo box. This widget colour can be changed by clicking on the coloured box below the combo box. A colour selection dialogue will then appear, from which you may select a new colour. When you are happy with your colour selection, press OK in the colour selection dialogue. The colour will be updated in the Preview Area. +The currently selected member of the colour scheme is shown in the combo box. This widget colour can be changed by clicking on the coloured box below the combo box. A colour selection dialogue will then appear, from which you may select a new colour. When you are happy with your colour selection, press OK in the colour selection dialogue. The colour will be updated in the Preview Area. -You may select any member of the colour scheme from the colour combination box. +You may select any member of the colour scheme from the colour combination box. -<guilabel ->Contrast</guilabel -> Slider +<guilabel>Contrast</guilabel> Slider -The Contrast slider allows you to change the contrast between different shadings of the selected colours. +The Contrast slider allows you to change the contrast between different shadings of the selected colours. -The preview area instantly updates to show the effect of your change. +The preview area instantly updates to show the effect of your change. -<guilabel ->Colour Scheme</guilabel -> - -Various colour schemes are supplied with &kde;, and you are free to define your own. - -The three major colour components of each scheme are shown beside the name in the list. To preview a scheme in the larger preview area, click on its name in the list box. - -You can use the &kde;-supplied Colour Schemes as a starting point to devise your own Scheme. Click on the Save Scheme... button to store the colour scheme under a new name, then modify it. - -When such a user-created Colour Scheme is selected, changes to it (as shown in the Preview) can be saved with the Save Scheme... button; it can also be deleted with the Remove Scheme button. - -The &kde;-supplied Schemes themselves cannot be changed or deleted. - -You can use the Import Scheme... button to add new entries to the list. This might be colour schemes that you have created on another computer and saved, or colour schemes you have downloaded from a website. - -You can choose if you want &kde; to apply the colour scheme even to non-&kde; applications by enabling the Apply colours to non-TDE applications. Not all applications will allow this, but most do. +<guilabel>Colour Scheme</guilabel> + +Various colour schemes are supplied with &kde;, and you are free to define your own. + +The three major colour components of each scheme are shown beside the name in the list. To preview a scheme in the larger preview area, click on its name in the list box. + +You can use the &kde;-supplied Colour Schemes as a starting point to devise your own Scheme. Click on the Save Scheme... button to store the colour scheme under a new name, then modify it. + +When such a user-created Colour Scheme is selected, changes to it (as shown in the Preview) can be saved with the Save Scheme... button; it can also be deleted with the Remove Scheme button. + +The &kde;-supplied Schemes themselves cannot be changed or deleted. + +You can use the Import Scheme... button to add new entries to the list. This might be colour schemes that you have created on another computer and saved, or colour schemes you have downloaded from a website. + +You can choose if you want &kde; to apply the colour scheme even to non-&kde; applications by enabling the Apply colours to non-TDE applications. Not all applications will allow this, but most do. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook index c08cc498bcb..5d6bf669449 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/cookies/index.docbook @@ -2,237 +2,128 @@ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -cookie +KDE +KControl +cookie -Cookies +Cookies -Cookies are a mechanism used by web sites to store and retrieve information using your browser. For example, a web site may allow you to customise the content and layout of the pages you see, so that your choices are persistent across different visits to that web site. +Cookies are a mechanism used by web sites to store and retrieve information using your browser. For example, a web site may allow you to customise the content and layout of the pages you see, so that your choices are persistent across different visits to that web site. -The web site is able to remember your preferences by storing a cookie on your computer. Then, on future visits, the web site retrieves the information stored in the cookie to format the content of the site according to your previously specified preferences. +The web site is able to remember your preferences by storing a cookie on your computer. Then, on future visits, the web site retrieves the information stored in the cookie to format the content of the site according to your previously specified preferences. -Thus, cookies play a very useful role in web browsing. Unfortunately, web sites often store and retrieve information in cookies without your explicit knowledge or consent. Some of this information may be quite useful to the web site owners, for example, by allowing them to collect summary statistics on the number of visits different areas of the web sites get, or to customise banner advertising. +Thus, cookies play a very useful role in web browsing. Unfortunately, web sites often store and retrieve information in cookies without your explicit knowledge or consent. Some of this information may be quite useful to the web site owners, for example, by allowing them to collect summary statistics on the number of visits different areas of the web sites get, or to customise banner advertising. -The cookies module of the &kcontrol; allows you to set policies for the use of cookies when you are browsing the web with the &konqueror; web browser. +The cookies module of the &kcontrol; allows you to set policies for the use of cookies when you are browsing the web with the &konqueror; web browser. -Note that the policies that you set using this control module will not apply to other web browsers such as &Netscape;. +Note that the policies that you set using this control module will not apply to other web browsers such as &Netscape;. -Policy +Policy -Using the Policy tab, you can configure the &kde; applications that will handle cookies. You can do this by specifying a general cookie policy as well as special cookie policies for certain domains or hosts. +Using the Policy tab, you can configure the &kde; applications that will handle cookies. You can do this by specifying a general cookie policy as well as special cookie policies for certain domains or hosts. -The top of the policy tab has a checkbox labeled Enable cookies. If you leave this unchecked cookies will be completely disabled. However, this may make browsing rather inconvenient especially as some web sites require the use of browsers with cookies enabled. +The top of the policy tab has a checkbox labeled Enable cookies. If you leave this unchecked cookies will be completely disabled. However, this may make browsing rather inconvenient especially as some web sites require the use of browsers with cookies enabled. -You will probably want to enable cookies and then set specific policies on how you want them to be handled. +You will probably want to enable cookies and then set specific policies on how you want them to be handled. -The first group of options create settings that apply to all cookies. +The first group of options create settings that apply to all cookies. -Only accept cookies from originating server +Only accept cookies from originating server -Some pages try to set cookies from servers other than the one you are seeing the HTML page from. For example, they show you advertisements, and the advertisements are from another computer, often one that belongs to a large advertising group. These advertisements may try to set a cookie which would allow them to track the pages you view across multiple web sites. -Disabling this option will mean only cookies that come from the same web server as you are explicitly connecting to will be accepted. +Some pages try to set cookies from servers other than the one you are seeing the HTML page from. For example, they show you advertisements, and the advertisements are from another computer, often one that belongs to a large advertising group. These advertisements may try to set a cookie which would allow them to track the pages you view across multiple web sites. +Disabling this option will mean only cookies that come from the same web server as you are explicitly connecting to will be accepted. -Automatically accept session cookies +Automatically accept session cookies -An increasingly common use for cookies is not to track your movements across many visits to a web site but to just follow what you do during one single visit. Session cookies are saved as long as you are looking at the site and deleted when you leave it. +An increasingly common use for cookies is not to track your movements across many visits to a web site but to just follow what you do during one single visit. Session cookies are saved as long as you are looking at the site and deleted when you leave it. -Web sites can use this information for various things, most commonly it is a convenience so that you do not have to keep logging in to view pages. For example, on a webmail site, without some kind of session ID, you would have to give your password again for each email you want to read. There are other ways to achieve this, but cookies are simple and very common. +Web sites can use this information for various things, most commonly it is a convenience so that you do not have to keep logging in to view pages. For example, on a webmail site, without some kind of session ID, you would have to give your password again for each email you want to read. There are other ways to achieve this, but cookies are simple and very common. -Enabling this option means that session cookies are always accepted, even if you don't accept any other kind, and even if you choose to reject cookies from a particular site, session cookies from that site will be accepted. +Enabling this option means that session cookies are always accepted, even if you don't accept any other kind, and even if you choose to reject cookies from a particular site, session cookies from that site will be accepted. -Treat all cookies as session cookies +Treat all cookies as session cookies -If this option is enabled, all cookies are treated as session cookies. That is, they are not kept when you leave the web site. +If this option is enabled, all cookies are treated as session cookies. That is, they are not kept when you leave the web site. -The definition of leave the web site is vague. Some cookies may hang around for a little while after you are no longer viewing any pages on a particular web site. This is normal. +The definition of leave the web site is vague. Some cookies may hang around for a little while after you are no longer viewing any pages on a particular web site. This is normal. -The section for Default Policy sets some further options that are mutually exclusive — you can choose only one of these options as the default, but you are free to set a different option for any specific web server. +The section for Default Policy sets some further options that are mutually exclusive — you can choose only one of these options as the default, but you are free to set a different option for any specific web server. -Ask for confirmation +Ask for confirmation -If this option is selected, you will be asked for confirmation every time a cookie is stored or retrieved. You can selectively accept or reject each cookie. The confirmation dialogue will also allow you to set a domain specific policy, if you do not want to confirm each cookie for that domain. +If this option is selected, you will be asked for confirmation every time a cookie is stored or retrieved. You can selectively accept or reject each cookie. The confirmation dialogue will also allow you to set a domain specific policy, if you do not want to confirm each cookie for that domain. -Accept all cookies +Accept all cookies -If this option is selected, all cookies will be accepted without asking for confirmation. +If this option is selected, all cookies will be accepted without asking for confirmation. -Reject all cookies +Reject all cookies -If this option is selected, all cookies will be rejected without asking for confirmation. +If this option is selected, all cookies will be rejected without asking for confirmation. -In addition to the default policy for handling of cookies, which you can set by selecting one of the three options described above, you can also set policies for specific host domains using the controls in the Domain Specific group. +In addition to the default policy for handling of cookies, which you can set by selecting one of the three options described above, you can also set policies for specific host domains using the controls in the Domain Specific group. -The Ask, Accept, or Reject policy can be applied to a specific domain by clicking on the New... button, which brings up a dialogue. In this dialogue, you can type the name of the domain (with a leading dot), then select the policy you want to apply to this domain. Note that entries may also get added while you are browsing, if the default policy is to ask for confirmation, and you choose a general policy for a specific host (for example, by selecting Reject all cookies from this domain when asked to confirm a cookie). +The Ask, Accept, or Reject policy can be applied to a specific domain by clicking on the New... button, which brings up a dialogue. In this dialogue, you can type the name of the domain (with a leading dot), then select the policy you want to apply to this domain. Note that entries may also get added while you are browsing, if the default policy is to ask for confirmation, and you choose a general policy for a specific host (for example, by selecting Reject all cookies from this domain when asked to confirm a cookie). -You can also select a specific host domain from the list and click the Change button to choose a different policy for that domain than the one shown in the list. +You can also select a specific host domain from the list and click the Change button to choose a different policy for that domain than the one shown in the list. -To delete a domain specific policy, choose a domain from the list, and then click the Delete button. The default policy will apply to domains which have been deleted from the list. +To delete a domain specific policy, choose a domain from the list, and then click the Delete button. The default policy will apply to domains which have been deleted from the list. -Management - -In the Management tab you can browse and selectively delete cookies that have been set in the past. - -In the upper part of this dialogue, you can see a list of domains displayed as a tree. Click on the little + next to a domain to see all cookies that have been set for this particular target domain. If you select one of these cookies, you will notice that its contents will show up in the frame Cookie Details below. - -By clicking the Delete button you can now delete the selected cookie. Click Delete All to delete all cookies stored. - -Choose Reload List to reload the list from your hard disk. You might want to do this if you have had the module open and are testing web sites or have made many changes in the module itself. +Management + +In the Management tab you can browse and selectively delete cookies that have been set in the past. + +In the upper part of this dialogue, you can see a list of domains displayed as a tree. Click on the little + next to a domain to see all cookies that have been set for this particular target domain. If you select one of these cookies, you will notice that its contents will show up in the frame Cookie Details below. + +By clicking the Delete button you can now delete the selected cookie. Click Delete All to delete all cookies stored. + +Choose Reload List to reload the list from your hard disk. You might want to do this if you have had the module open and are testing web sites or have made many changes in the module itself. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook index 0c4d8e716c4..65ec3b1d583 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/crypto/index.docbook @@ -2,311 +2,159 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-10-17 -3.1 +2002-10-17 +3.1 -KDE -KControl -crypto -SSL -encryption +KDE +KControl +crypto +SSL +encryption -Encryption Configuration +Encryption Configuration -Introduction -Many applications within &kde; are capable of exchanging information using encrypted files and/or network transmissions. +Introduction +Many applications within &kde; are capable of exchanging information using encrypted files and/or network transmissions. -Use - -All encryption schemes are only as strong as their weakest link. In general, unless you have some previous training/knowledge, it is better to leave this module unchanged. - -The options within this module can be divided into two groups: - -Two options along the bottom of the module, Warn on entering SSL Mode and Warn on leaving SSL mode, allow you to determine if &kde; should inform you when you enter or leave SSL encryption. - -The remainder of the options are about determining which encryption methods to use, and which should not be used. Once you have selected the appropriate encryption protocols, simply click Apply to commit your changes. - -Only make changes to this module if specific information about the strength or weakness of a particular encryption method is given to you from a reliable source. +Use + +All encryption schemes are only as strong as their weakest link. In general, unless you have some previous training/knowledge, it is better to leave this module unchanged. + +The options within this module can be divided into two groups: + +Two options along the bottom of the module, Warn on entering SSL Mode and Warn on leaving SSL mode, allow you to determine if &kde; should inform you when you enter or leave SSL encryption. + +The remainder of the options are about determining which encryption methods to use, and which should not be used. Once you have selected the appropriate encryption protocols, simply click Apply to commit your changes. + +Only make changes to this module if specific information about the strength or weakness of a particular encryption method is given to you from a reliable source. -The <guilabel ->SSL</guilabel -> Tab - -The first option is Enable TLS support if supported by the server. TLS is Transport Layer Security, and is the newest version of SSL. It integrates better than SSL with other protocols, and it has replaced SSL in protocols such as POP3 and SMTP. - -Then next options are Enable SSL v2 and Enable SSL v3. These are the second and third revision of the SSL protocol, and it is normal to enable both. - -There are several different Ciphers available, and you can enable these separately in the lists labelled SSL v2 Ciphers to Use and SSL v3 Ciphers to Use. The actual protocol to use is negotiated by the application and the server when the connection is created. - -There are several Cipher Wizards to help you choose a set that is suitable for your use. +The <guilabel>SSL</guilabel> Tab + +The first option is Enable TLS support if supported by the server. TLS is Transport Layer Security, and is the newest version of SSL. It integrates better than SSL with other protocols, and it has replaced SSL in protocols such as POP3 and SMTP. + +Then next options are Enable SSL v2 and Enable SSL v3. These are the second and third revision of the SSL protocol, and it is normal to enable both. + +There are several different Ciphers available, and you can enable these separately in the lists labelled SSL v2 Ciphers to Use and SSL v3 Ciphers to Use. The actual protocol to use is negotiated by the application and the server when the connection is created. + +There are several Cipher Wizards to help you choose a set that is suitable for your use. -Most Compatible +Most Compatible -Select the settings found to be most compatible with the most servers. +Select the settings found to be most compatible with the most servers. -US Ciphers Only +US Ciphers Only -Select only the US strong (128 bit or greater) ciphers. +Select only the US strong (128 bit or greater) ciphers. -Export Ciphers Only +Export Ciphers Only -Select only the weak (56 bit or less) ciphers. +Select only the weak (56 bit or less) ciphers. -Enable All +Enable All -Select all ciphers and methods. +Select all ciphers and methods. -Finally, there are some general SSL settings. +Finally, there are some general SSL settings. -Use EGD +Use EGD -If selected, OpenSSL will be asked to use the entropy gathering daemon (EGD) for initialising the pseudo-random number generator. +If selected, OpenSSL will be asked to use the entropy gathering daemon (EGD) for initialising the pseudo-random number generator. -Use entropy file +Use entropy file -If selected, OpenSSL will be asked to use the given file as entropy for initialising the pseudo-random number generator. +If selected, OpenSSL will be asked to use the given file as entropy for initialising the pseudo-random number generator. -Warn on entering SSL mode +Warn on entering SSL mode -If selected, you will be notified when entering an SSL enabled site. +If selected, you will be notified when entering an SSL enabled site. -Warn on leaving SSL mode +Warn on leaving SSL mode -If selected, you will be notified when leaving an SSL based site. +If selected, you will be notified when leaving an SSL based site. -Warn on sending unencrypted data +Warn on sending unencrypted data -If selected, you will be notified before sending unencrypted data via a web browser. +If selected, you will be notified before sending unencrypted data via a web browser. -The <guilabel ->OpenSSL</guilabel -> Tab - -Here you can test if your OpenSSL libraries have been detected correctly by &kde;, with the Test button. - -If the test is unsuccessful, you can specify a path to the libraries in the field labelled Path to OpenSSL Shared Libraries. +The <guilabel>OpenSSL</guilabel> Tab + +Here you can test if your OpenSSL libraries have been detected correctly by &kde;, with the Test button. + +If the test is unsuccessful, you can specify a path to the libraries in the field labelled Path to OpenSSL Shared Libraries. -The <guilabel ->Your Certificates</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Your Certificates</guilabel> Tab -The list shows which certificates of yours &kde; knows about. You can easily manage them from here. +The list shows which certificates of yours &kde; knows about. You can easily manage them from here. -The <guilabel ->Authentication</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Authentication</guilabel> Tab -Not yet documented +Not yet documented -The <guilabel ->Peer SSL Certificates</guilabel -> Tab +The <guilabel>Peer SSL Certificates</guilabel> Tab -The list box shows which site and personal certificates &kde; knows about. You can easily manage them from here. +The list box shows which site and personal certificates &kde; knows about. You can easily manage them from here. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook index 43b1ffca305..e529e365342 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktop/index.docbook @@ -2,153 +2,77 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-08 -3.2 +2003-10-08 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -desktop +KDE +KControl +desktop -Desktop +Desktop -<guilabel ->Appearance Tab</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Appearance Tab</guilabel> -Here you can configure how icons on your desktop appear. +Here you can configure how icons on your desktop appear. -Standard font: -This option can be used to change the typeface used on the desktop. Simply select your typeface from the dropdown box. +Standard font: +This option can be used to change the typeface used on the desktop. Simply select your typeface from the dropdown box. -Font size: -You can change the relative size of the text on the Desktop. +Font size: +You can change the relative size of the text on the Desktop. -Normal text colour: -This option lets you select the colour of normal (or unhighlighted) text. +Normal text colour: +This option lets you select the colour of normal (or unhighlighted) text. -Text background colour: -This option lets you select the background colour of normal text. If left unchecked, the text has a transparent background. If selected, you can choose the colour by pressing the button. +Text background colour: +This option lets you select the background colour of normal text. If left unchecked, the text has a transparent background. If selected, you can choose the colour by pressing the button. -Underline filenames: -Determines if file names are underlined on the Desktop. +Underline filenames: +Determines if file names are underlined on the Desktop. -<guilabel ->Multiple Desktops</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Multiple Desktops</guilabel> -&kde; offers you the possibility to have several virtual desktops. In this tab you can configure the number of desktops as well as their names. Just use the slider to adjust the number of desktops. You can assign names to the desktops by entering text into the text fields below. +&kde; offers you the possibility to have several virtual desktops. In this tab you can configure the number of desktops as well as their names. Just use the slider to adjust the number of desktops. You can assign names to the desktops by entering text into the text fields below. -If enable Mouse wheel over desktop switches desktop then scrolling the wheel over an empty space on the desktop will change the the next virtual desktop numerically, in the direction you scrolled (either up or down). +If enable Mouse wheel over desktop switches desktop then scrolling the wheel over an empty space on the desktop will change the the next virtual desktop numerically, in the direction you scrolled (either up or down). -<guilabel ->Paths</guilabel -> - -You can use this section to configure where Desktop files, Wastebin files, and Autostart files are stored on your computer as well as the standard path for documents. - -By changing the values in the first three of these paths, you will automatically move the files from their previous to their new location. - -Do not just delete the icons from the desktop. If you dislike them move them somewhere else in this module or hide them (with a dot in the front of the filename). If the paths in this dialogue do not exist when &kde; is started, they will be recreated. +<guilabel>Paths</guilabel> + +You can use this section to configure where Desktop files, Wastebin files, and Autostart files are stored on your computer as well as the standard path for documents. + +By changing the values in the first three of these paths, you will automatically move the files from their previous to their new location. + +Do not just delete the icons from the desktop. If you dislike them move them somewhere else in this module or hide them (with a dot in the front of the filename). If the paths in this dialogue do not exist when &kde; is started, they will be recreated. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook index 80ad24d9b3c..53aa4e1ffad 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/desktopbehavior/index.docbook @@ -2,218 +2,113 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -desktop +KDE +KControl +desktop -Desktop Behaviour +Desktop Behaviour -<guilabel ->Desktop</guilabel -> Tab +<guilabel>Desktop</guilabel> Tab -Show icons on desktop +Show icons on desktop -Uncheck this option if you do not want to have icons on the desktop. Without icons the desktop may be somewhat faster, but you will no longer be able to drag files to the desktop. -This will not remove any files already stored on the desktop, they will instead be hidden. +Uncheck this option if you do not want to have icons on the desktop. Without icons the desktop may be somewhat faster, but you will no longer be able to drag files to the desktop. +This will not remove any files already stored on the desktop, they will instead be hidden. -If this is enabled, several further options become available: +If this is enabled, several further options become available: -Automatically line up icons -If this option is enabled, &kde; will align icons on a grid on the desktop. If it is not enabled, you may drop icons anywhere, and they will not be aligned for you. +Automatically line up icons +If this option is enabled, &kde; will align icons on a grid on the desktop. If it is not enabled, you may drop icons anywhere, and they will not be aligned for you. -Show hidden files -If this option is enabled, then all hidden files will appear on the desktop. Generally this only clutters your desktop area, but if you are often working with hidden files or folders, this can be useful. -Be very careful when deleting or modifying hidden files. Many of these files are configuration files and are essential for the correct operation of your computer. +Show hidden files +If this option is enabled, then all hidden files will appear on the desktop. Generally this only clutters your desktop area, but if you are often working with hidden files or folders, this can be useful. +Be very careful when deleting or modifying hidden files. Many of these files are configuration files and are essential for the correct operation of your computer. -Allow programs in desktop window +Allow programs in desktop window -Enabling this option allows you to set a program as your desktop background, for example xearth, or &kworldclock; +Enabling this option allows you to set a program as your desktop background, for example xearth, or &kworldclock; -Below these options you can see a list titled Show Icon Previews For. The &kde; desktop has a preview feature for many file types, including HTML files, images, &PostScript; and PDF, sound, web archives (if you have the appropriate &konqueror; plugin installed) and text files. - -if you enable previews for one of these, files of that particular file type will not be represented by standard icons on the desktop, but will instead be shown as miniature previews. On slow computers, the previews can take some time to show up, so you might not want to enable this feature. - -Finally there is Display device icons:. - -On some operating systems (&Linux; and FreeBSD, so far) &kde; can dynamically display icons for each mountable device you have available. This could be &CD-ROM; drives, floppy disk drives, or network shares. - -If you enable this, you can choose what kind, if any, of these devices you would like quick access icons to be displayed for. +Below these options you can see a list titled Show Icon Previews For. The &kde; desktop has a preview feature for many file types, including HTML files, images, &PostScript; and PDF, sound, web archives (if you have the appropriate &konqueror; plugin installed) and text files. + +if you enable previews for one of these, files of that particular file type will not be represented by standard icons on the desktop, but will instead be shown as miniature previews. On slow computers, the previews can take some time to show up, so you might not want to enable this feature. + +Finally there is Display device icons:. + +On some operating systems (&Linux; and FreeBSD, so far) &kde; can dynamically display icons for each mountable device you have available. This could be &CD-ROM; drives, floppy disk drives, or network shares. + +If you enable this, you can choose what kind, if any, of these devices you would like quick access icons to be displayed for. -Show tooltips +Show tooltips -Check this option if you would like to see tooltips for icons on the desktop as you hover the mouse over them. These tooltips display information about the file represented by the icon. Depending on the type of file, the information can range from simple file size and creation dates for unfamiliar file types, to complete meta information such as the content of tags for music files. +Check this option if you would like to see tooltips for icons on the desktop as you hover the mouse over them. These tooltips display information about the file represented by the icon. Depending on the type of file, the information can range from simple file size and creation dates for unfamiliar file types, to complete meta information such as the content of tags for music files. -Mouse button actions: +Mouse button actions: -The mouse button section allows you to determine what happens when you click one of the three mouse buttons on the Desktop (where there is no window). +The mouse button section allows you to determine what happens when you click one of the three mouse buttons on the Desktop (where there is no window). -Not all mice have three buttons. Two button mice can usually activate the Middle button by pressing both the Left and Right mouse buttons at the same time. +Not all mice have three buttons. Two button mice can usually activate the Middle button by pressing both the Left and Right mouse buttons at the same time. -For each of the three mouse buttons, you can select: +For each of the three mouse buttons, you can select: -No Action -When you use this mouse button, nothing happens. +No Action +When you use this mouse button, nothing happens. -Window list menu -This brings up a submenu with all the virtual desktops. Under each virtual desktop, you can select any window currently located on that desktop. Once selected, &kde; will switch to that desktop, and place the focus on that window. +Window list menu +This brings up a submenu with all the virtual desktops. Under each virtual desktop, you can select any window currently located on that desktop. Once selected, &kde; will switch to that desktop, and place the focus on that window. -Desktop Menu. -This brings up a submenu with commands specific to &kde;. You can create icons, edit bookmarks, cut and paste, run commands, configure &kde;, arrange icons, lock the session and log out of &kde;. The exact content of the menu varies depending on the current status of &kde;. +Desktop Menu. +This brings up a submenu with commands specific to &kde;. You can create icons, edit bookmarks, cut and paste, run commands, configure &kde;, arrange icons, lock the session and log out of &kde;. The exact content of the menu varies depending on the current status of &kde;. -Application Menu -This brings up the Application Menus (also know as the K Menus), so you can start a new application. +Application Menu +This brings up the Application Menus (also know as the K Menus), so you can start a new application. @@ -222,22 +117,11 @@ -Show menu bar at the top of the screeen: +Show menu bar at the top of the screeen: -This option determines whether there is a menu across the top of the &kde; Desktop similar to the style of &MacOS;. - -The default is None. If you select Desktop menu bar one static menu is shown at the top of the screen, displaying the desktop menu. Finally there is Current application's menu bar (Mac OS-style). If this option is selected, applications won't have their menu bar attached to their own window anymore. Instead, there is one menu bar at the top of the screen which shows the menus of the currently active application. You might recognise this behaviour from &MacOS;. +This option determines whether there is a menu across the top of the &kde; Desktop similar to the style of &MacOS;. + +The default is None. If you select Desktop menu bar one static menu is shown at the top of the screen, displaying the desktop menu. Finally there is Current application's menu bar (Mac OS-style). If this option is selected, applications won't have their menu bar attached to their own window anymore. Instead, there is one menu bar at the top of the screen which shows the menus of the currently active application. You might recognise this behaviour from &MacOS;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook index 2753da77908..cc60b7c1206 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/ebrowsing/index.docbook @@ -2,225 +2,75 @@ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -&Yves.Arrouye; &Yves.Arrouye.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +&Yves.Arrouye; &Yves.Arrouye.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-10-16 -3.1 +2002-10-16 +3.1 -KDE -KControl -enhanced browsing -web shortcuts -browsing +KDE +KControl +enhanced browsing +web shortcuts +browsing -Web Shortcuts +Web Shortcuts -Introduction - -&konqueror; offers some features to enhance your browsing experience. One such feature is Web Shortcuts. - -You may already have noticed that &kde; is very Internet friendly. For example, you can click on the Run menu item or type the keyboard shortcut assigned to that command (AltF2, unless you have changed it) and type in a URI. Uniform Resource Identifier. A standard way of referring to a resource such as a file on your computer, a World Wide Web address, an email address, etc.... - -Web shortcuts, on the other hand, let you come up with new pseudo URL schemes, or shortcuts, that basically let you parameterise commonly used URIs. For example, if you like the Google search engine, you can configure KDE so that a pseudo URL scheme like gg will trigger a search on Google. This way, typing gg:my query will search for my query on Google. - -One can see why we call these pseudo URL schemes. They are used like a URL scheme, but the input is not properly URL encoded, so one will type google:kde apps and not google:kde+apps. - -You can use web shortcuts wherever you would normally use URIs. Shortcuts for several search engines should already be configured on your system, but you can add new keywords and change or delete existing ones in the enhanced browsing control module. +Introduction + +&konqueror; offers some features to enhance your browsing experience. One such feature is Web Shortcuts. + +You may already have noticed that &kde; is very Internet friendly. For example, you can click on the Run menu item or type the keyboard shortcut assigned to that command (AltF2, unless you have changed it) and type in a URI. Uniform Resource Identifier. A standard way of referring to a resource such as a file on your computer, a World Wide Web address, an email address, etc.... + +Web shortcuts, on the other hand, let you come up with new pseudo URL schemes, or shortcuts, that basically let you parameterise commonly used URIs. For example, if you like the Google search engine, you can configure KDE so that a pseudo URL scheme like gg will trigger a search on Google. This way, typing gg:my query will search for my query on Google. + +One can see why we call these pseudo URL schemes. They are used like a URL scheme, but the input is not properly URL encoded, so one will type google:kde apps and not google:kde+apps. + +You can use web shortcuts wherever you would normally use URIs. Shortcuts for several search engines should already be configured on your system, but you can add new keywords and change or delete existing ones in the enhanced browsing control module. -Use +Use -There is a single tab in this control module. The title of the tab is Keywords. This tab features two main boxes, one for Internet Keywords and one for web shortcuts. +There is a single tab in this control module. The title of the tab is Keywords. This tab features two main boxes, one for Internet Keywords and one for web shortcuts. -Web Shortcuts - -The descriptive names of defined web shortcuts are shown in a listbox. As with other lists in &kde;, you can click on a column heading to toggle the sort order between ascending and descending, and you can resize the columns. - -If you double-click on a specific entry in the list of defined search providers, the details for that entry are shown in a popup dialogue. In addition to the descriptive name for the item, you can also see the URI which is used, as well as the associated shortcuts which you can type anywhere in &kde; where URIs are expected. A given search provider can have multiple shortcuts, each separated by a comma. - -The text boxes are used not only for displaying information about an item in the list of web shortcuts, but also for modifying or adding new items. - -You can change the contents of either the Search URI or the URI Shortcuts text box. Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to exit the dialogue with no changes. - -If you examine the contents of the Search URI text box, you will find that most, if not all of the entries have a in them. This sequence of two characters acts as a parameter, which is to say that they are replaced by whatever you happen to type after the colon character that is between a shortcut and its parameter. Let's consider some examples to clarify this idea. - -Suppose that the URI is http://www.google.com/search?q=\{@}, and gg is a shortcut to this URI. Then, typing gg:alpha is equivalent to http://www.google.com/search?q=alpha. You could type anything after the : character; whatever you have typed simply replaces the characters, after being converted to the appropriate character set for the search provider and then properly URL-encoded. Only the part of the search URI is touched, the rest of it is supposed to be properly URL-encoded already and is left as is. - -You can also have shortcuts without parameters. Suppose the URI was file:/home/me/mydocs/kofficefiles/kword and the shortcut was mykword. Then, typing mykword: is the same as typing the complete URI. Note that there is nothing after the colon when typing the shortcut, but the colon is still required in order for the shortcut to be recognised as such. - -By now, you will have understood that even though these shortcuts are called web shortcuts, they really are shortcuts to parameterised URIs, which can point not only to web sites like search engines but also to anything else that can be pointed to by a URI. Web shortcuts are a very powerful feature of navigation in &kde;. +Web Shortcuts + +The descriptive names of defined web shortcuts are shown in a listbox. As with other lists in &kde;, you can click on a column heading to toggle the sort order between ascending and descending, and you can resize the columns. + +If you double-click on a specific entry in the list of defined search providers, the details for that entry are shown in a popup dialogue. In addition to the descriptive name for the item, you can also see the URI which is used, as well as the associated shortcuts which you can type anywhere in &kde; where URIs are expected. A given search provider can have multiple shortcuts, each separated by a comma. + +The text boxes are used not only for displaying information about an item in the list of web shortcuts, but also for modifying or adding new items. + +You can change the contents of either the Search URI or the URI Shortcuts text box. Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to exit the dialogue with no changes. + +If you examine the contents of the Search URI text box, you will find that most, if not all of the entries have a in them. This sequence of two characters acts as a parameter, which is to say that they are replaced by whatever you happen to type after the colon character that is between a shortcut and its parameter. Let's consider some examples to clarify this idea. + +Suppose that the URI is http://www.google.com/search?q=\{@}, and gg is a shortcut to this URI. Then, typing gg:alpha is equivalent to http://www.google.com/search?q=alpha. You could type anything after the : character; whatever you have typed simply replaces the characters, after being converted to the appropriate character set for the search provider and then properly URL-encoded. Only the part of the search URI is touched, the rest of it is supposed to be properly URL-encoded already and is left as is. + +You can also have shortcuts without parameters. Suppose the URI was file:/home/me/mydocs/kofficefiles/kword and the shortcut was mykword. Then, typing mykword: is the same as typing the complete URI. Note that there is nothing after the colon when typing the shortcut, but the colon is still required in order for the shortcut to be recognised as such. + +By now, you will have understood that even though these shortcuts are called web shortcuts, they really are shortcuts to parameterised URIs, which can point not only to web sites like search engines but also to anything else that can be pointed to by a URI. Web shortcuts are a very powerful feature of navigation in &kde;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook index f4571453809..2497c28be53 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/email/index.docbook @@ -2,128 +2,70 @@ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-09-01 -3.1.00 +2002-09-01 +3.1.00 -KDE -KControl -email -e-mail +KDE +KControl +email +e-mail -Email +Email -Introduction +Introduction -The email module of the &kcontrol; allows you to enter and save some basic email information. This information is used when performing functions related to email within &kde;, for example, when sending bug reports from the &kde; crash handler application. +The email module of the &kcontrol; allows you to enter and save some basic email information. This information is used when performing functions related to email within &kde;, for example, when sending bug reports from the &kde; crash handler application. -Programs such as &kmail;, which are used for reading and sending email, may offer many more options for customising the way in which email is handled. These options depend upon the specific program being used. &kmail;, for instance, offers its own configuration facilities. +Programs such as &kmail;, which are used for reading and sending email, may offer many more options for customising the way in which email is handled. These options depend upon the specific program being used. &kmail;, for instance, offers its own configuration facilities. -Some of the information needed for configuring email should have been provided by your internet service provider (ISP). If you are connected to a local network, then the system administrator of your network should be able to help you. +Some of the information needed for configuring email should have been provided by your internet service provider (ISP). If you are connected to a local network, then the system administrator of your network should be able to help you. -Use +Use -&kde; automatically establishes some of the information for this control module using the login information on the system. You will need to enter the remaining information. -Looking at the page from top to bottom, the options are: +&kde; automatically establishes some of the information for this control module using the login information on the system. You will need to enter the remaining information. +Looking at the page from top to bottom, the options are: -Full name -Type your full name as you would like it to appear in the email messages that you send. +Full name +Type your full name as you would like it to appear in the email messages that you send. -Organisation -If you work for a company or organisation, you can enter its name in this text box. +Organisation +If you work for a company or organisation, you can enter its name in this text box. -Email address -To be able to use email, you must enter your email address here. +Email address +To be able to use email, you must enter your email address here. -Reply-to address -If replies to your email messages should be sent to a different address, you can enter that address in this text box. +Reply-to address +If replies to your email messages should be sent to a different address, you can enter that address in this text box. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook index 4814541ce14..c2bdd26c078 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/energy/index.docbook @@ -2,134 +2,68 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -energy +KDE +KControl +energy -Energy +Energy -Introduction - -This module is useful for any computer having a monitor labelled Energy Star Compliant. (Energy Star Compliant equipment is equipment that can be configured to automatically enter a power saving mode when appropriate, without human intervention.) - -Energy Star Compliance can be applied to nearly any electrical device. This module, however, does not spin down hard drives, does not shutdown printers, &etc; These settings only affect the behaviour of your monitor. - -For information on shutting down components on a laptop, do not use this module. Instead, install tdeutils, and refer to the module entitled Laptop Power Control Centre, for details. - -In the case of computer monitors, the computer can control the monitor, switching it between four states: On, Standby, Suspend, and Off. - -The following list of states is a generalisation, and you may find that your monitor will differ from the descriptions below. - -ON is the normal operation of your monitor while you are using it. - -STANDBY is usually a minor power saving level. This setting usually involves blanking the screen, and not firing the electron gun, but keeping the electron gun energised and ready to go. When you need to use the monitor again, the monitor will come back on very quickly. - -SUSPEND is a very low power mode alternative. With most monitors the screen is blanked, the electron gun is shut down and the magnets that control the electron gun are powered down. While the power saving is substantial, to reactivate the monitor may take up to 10-15 seconds. The computer should always be able to return the monitor to On or Standby while in suspend mode. - -OFF, usually means just that. The computer monitor is turned off. This usually means that the computer will not be able to turn the monitor back on by itself. Obviously, this keeps power consumption to a bare minimum (zero). +Introduction + +This module is useful for any computer having a monitor labelled Energy Star Compliant. (Energy Star Compliant equipment is equipment that can be configured to automatically enter a power saving mode when appropriate, without human intervention.) + +Energy Star Compliance can be applied to nearly any electrical device. This module, however, does not spin down hard drives, does not shutdown printers, &etc; These settings only affect the behaviour of your monitor. + +For information on shutting down components on a laptop, do not use this module. Instead, install tdeutils, and refer to the module entitled Laptop Power Control Centre, for details. + +In the case of computer monitors, the computer can control the monitor, switching it between four states: On, Standby, Suspend, and Off. + +The following list of states is a generalisation, and you may find that your monitor will differ from the descriptions below. + +ON is the normal operation of your monitor while you are using it. + +STANDBY is usually a minor power saving level. This setting usually involves blanking the screen, and not firing the electron gun, but keeping the electron gun energised and ready to go. When you need to use the monitor again, the monitor will come back on very quickly. + +SUSPEND is a very low power mode alternative. With most monitors the screen is blanked, the electron gun is shut down and the magnets that control the electron gun are powered down. While the power saving is substantial, to reactivate the monitor may take up to 10-15 seconds. The computer should always be able to return the monitor to On or Standby while in suspend mode. + +OFF, usually means just that. The computer monitor is turned off. This usually means that the computer will not be able to turn the monitor back on by itself. Obviously, this keeps power consumption to a bare minimum (zero). -Use - -Using this module is very simple: - -If your monitor is Energy Star Compliant, then you should put a mark in the check box labeled Enable Display Energy Saving. This will activate the energy saving commands. - -The next three slider bars, tell the computer how many minutes of inactivity before automatically switching to a new state. These numbers can be adjusted with either the sliders, or the spin boxes. - -These times are not additive, but all start counting at zero. - -As an example: - -If you set the Standby Mode to 10 minutes, the Suspend mode to 20 minutes, and the Power off at 30 minutes, and you stop using your computer at 9:00, then the monitor will: Enter Standby mode at 9:10, enter Suspend mode at 9:20, and shut the power off at 9:30. - -When you are happy with the settings, click OK. +Use + +Using this module is very simple: + +If your monitor is Energy Star Compliant, then you should put a mark in the check box labeled Enable Display Energy Saving. This will activate the energy saving commands. + +The next three slider bars, tell the computer how many minutes of inactivity before automatically switching to a new state. These numbers can be adjusted with either the sliders, or the spin boxes. + +These times are not additive, but all start counting at zero. + +As an example: + +If you set the Standby Mode to 10 minutes, the Suspend mode to 20 minutes, and the Power off at 30 minutes, and you stop using your computer at 9:00, then the monitor will: Enter Standby mode at 9:10, enter Suspend mode at 9:20, and shut the power off at 9:30. + +When you are happy with the settings, click OK. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook index 91d669d56e7..75f7680ea13 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filemanager/index.docbook @@ -2,374 +2,201 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-10-16 -3.1 +2002-10-16 +3.1 -KDE -KControl -file manager +KDE +KControl +file manager -File Manager +File Manager -In this module, you can configure various aspects of &konqueror;'s file manager functionality. +In this module, you can configure various aspects of &konqueror;'s file manager functionality. -&konqueror;'s web browser functionality has its own configuration modules. +&konqueror;'s web browser functionality has its own configuration modules. -Use +Use -The configuration options for the file manager are organised under tabs as follows: +The configuration options for the file manager are organised under tabs as follows: -Appearance -This tab contains options for customising the appearance of &konqueror; windows, such as the default font text colour. +Appearance +This tab contains options for customising the appearance of &konqueror; windows, such as the default font text colour. -Behaviour -This tab contains a couple of &konqueror; global options. +Behaviour +This tab contains a couple of &konqueror; global options. -Previews +Previews -On this tab, you can customise when &konqueror; should show previews. +On this tab, you can customise when &konqueror; should show previews. -Appearance +Appearance -The following settings determine how text and colours are displayed in &konqueror; File Manager mode windows. +The following settings determine how text and colours are displayed in &konqueror; File Manager mode windows. -Standard font: +Standard font: -This is the font used to display text such as file names in &konqueror; windows. +This is the font used to display text such as file names in &konqueror; windows. -Font size: +Font size: -Lets you control the size of text, while the Standard Font setting determines the font face used. +Lets you control the size of text, while the Standard Font setting determines the font face used. -Normal text colour: +Normal text colour: -Determines the standard text colour. +Determines the standard text colour. -Word-wrap icon text: +Word-wrap icon text: -When checked, long filenames will be wrapped onto multiple lines, rather than showing only the part of the filename that fits on a single line. +When checked, long filenames will be wrapped onto multiple lines, rather than showing only the part of the filename that fits on a single line. - If you uncheck this option, you can still see word-wrapped filenames by pausing the mouse pointer over the icon. + If you uncheck this option, you can still see word-wrapped filenames by pausing the mouse pointer over the icon. -Underline filenames: +Underline filenames: -When Underline filenames is checked, filenames will be underlined so that they look like links on a web page. +When Underline filenames is checked, filenames will be underlined so that they look like links on a web page. -Display file sizes in bytes: +Display file sizes in bytes: -The final check box on this page determines how &konqueror; displays file sizes, when you are in one of the file manager modes that normally shows this information. If you check the Display file sizes in bytes box then file sizes are always shown in bytes. If you leave it unchecked then file sizes are shown in bytes, kilobytes or megabytes, depending on their size. +The final check box on this page determines how &konqueror; displays file sizes, when you are in one of the file manager modes that normally shows this information. If you check the Display file sizes in bytes box then file sizes are always shown in bytes. If you leave it unchecked then file sizes are shown in bytes, kilobytes or megabytes, depending on their size. -Behaviour +Behaviour -<guilabel ->Misc Options</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Misc Options</guilabel> -Open folders in separate windows - If this option is checked, a new &konqueror; window will be created when you open a folder, rather than simply showing that folder's contents in the current window. +Open folders in separate windows + If this option is checked, a new &konqueror; window will be created when you open a folder, rather than simply showing that folder's contents in the current window. -Show network operations in a single window +Show network operations in a single window -If unchecked, and you download a file, a dialogue box will appear that shows the status of the download. +If unchecked, and you download a file, a dialogue box will appear that shows the status of the download. - Download Dialogue Box + Download Dialogue Box - - Download Dialogue Box + Download Dialogue Box - Individual Download Dialogue Box + Individual Download Dialogue Box -If you start a new transfer, another dialogue box will appear. (&Netscape; users will be familiar with this behaviour) +If you start a new transfer, another dialogue box will appear. (&Netscape; users will be familiar with this behaviour) -If checked, all transfer status windows will be grouped together under a single dialogue box. +If checked, all transfer status windows will be grouped together under a single dialogue box. - Download Dialogue Box + Download Dialogue Box - - Download Dialogue Box + Download Dialogue Box - Collected Download Dialogue Box + Collected Download Dialogue Box -If you choose to use the Collected download dialogue box, you can delete transfers by clicking once on the transfer you want to cancel, then clicking the Delete Button on the left. +If you choose to use the Collected download dialogue box, you can delete transfers by clicking once on the transfer you want to cancel, then clicking the Delete Button on the left. -Show file tips +Show file tips -Here you can control if, when moving the mouse over a file, you want to see a small popup window with additional information about that file. +Here you can control if, when moving the mouse over a file, you want to see a small popup window with additional information about that file. -Show previews in file tips +Show previews in file tips -Here you can control if the file tip should show a thumbnail preview of the file. +Here you can control if the file tip should show a thumbnail preview of the file. -Home URL -This is the &URL; (⪚ a folder or a web page) where &konqueror; will jump to when the Home button is pressed.The default is the users home folder, indicated with a ~. +Home URL +This is the &URL; (⪚ a folder or a web page) where &konqueror; will jump to when the Home button is pressed.The default is the users home folder, indicated with a ~. -You can set a path that is your Home URL by typing into the text field, or using the browse icon. The default is ~ which is a standard shortcut for your $HOME folder. When you choose the home icon on your panel, in a file open or save dialogue, or from within &konqueror; in file manager mode, this is the folder you will be shown. - -The Ask confirmation for setting tells &konqueror; what to do when you choose to Delete, Trash, or Shred a file in a &konqueror; window. If any box is checked, &konqueror; asks for confirmation before performing the corresponding action. +You can set a path that is your Home URL by typing into the text field, or using the browse icon. The default is ~ which is a standard shortcut for your $HOME folder. When you choose the home icon on your panel, in a file open or save dialogue, or from within &konqueror; in file manager mode, this is the folder you will be shown. + +The Ask confirmation for setting tells &konqueror; what to do when you choose to Delete, Trash, or Shred a file in a &konqueror; window. If any box is checked, &konqueror; asks for confirmation before performing the corresponding action. -Previews - -&konqueror; has a preview feature for many file types, including HTML files, images, &PostScript; and PDF, sound, web archives (if you have the appropriate &konqueror; plugin installed) and text files. - -If you enable previews for one of these, files of that particular file type will not be represented by standard icons in the filemanager, but will instead be shown as miniature previews. On slow computers, the previews can take some time to show up, so you might not want to enable this feature. - -In this module you can specify which protocols you wish the previews to be available for. Creating the previews requires that &konqueror; download at least part of the file, in order to create the preview. &konqueror;, like the rest of &kde; is entirely network transparent, and will treat a remote &FTP; folder just as if it was on your local hard drive. This can result in a delay, especially if you are viewing, for example, a folder full of images over a slow network connection. - -For each protocol, you can independently enable or disable previews. For example, you might enable previews for NFS mounted drives if you have a fast network, but disable them for &FTP; because your Internet connection is via a modem. - -You can further refine the maximum size file that &konqueror; will attempt to show a preview for. The default is 1 MB. In other words, by default, if a file is 900 kb in size, and the protocol you are viewing the folder with is enabled, then &konqueror; will create a preview icon for it. If the file is 1.1 MB in size, &konqueror; will not make a preview, even if the protocol is enabled. - -You can turn on and off previews on the fly from within &konqueror;, using the View menu. For example, if you normally want to see image previews on every protocol but find a particular server is very slow to send you the data, you might turn it off for the present, and turn it on again later. - -You may also like to enable the checkbox Increase size of previews relative to icons, in order to see more information in the thumbnails. - -Many image files already contain a thumbnail. You can enable the Use thumbnails embedded in files to make use of these. This will save time waiting for thumbnails to be created when viewing a folder full of images you have not previously seen in &konqueror;. +Previews + +&konqueror; has a preview feature for many file types, including HTML files, images, &PostScript; and PDF, sound, web archives (if you have the appropriate &konqueror; plugin installed) and text files. + +If you enable previews for one of these, files of that particular file type will not be represented by standard icons in the filemanager, but will instead be shown as miniature previews. On slow computers, the previews can take some time to show up, so you might not want to enable this feature. + +In this module you can specify which protocols you wish the previews to be available for. Creating the previews requires that &konqueror; download at least part of the file, in order to create the preview. &konqueror;, like the rest of &kde; is entirely network transparent, and will treat a remote &FTP; folder just as if it was on your local hard drive. This can result in a delay, especially if you are viewing, for example, a folder full of images over a slow network connection. + +For each protocol, you can independently enable or disable previews. For example, you might enable previews for NFS mounted drives if you have a fast network, but disable them for &FTP; because your Internet connection is via a modem. + +You can further refine the maximum size file that &konqueror; will attempt to show a preview for. The default is 1 MB. In other words, by default, if a file is 900 kb in size, and the protocol you are viewing the folder with is enabled, then &konqueror; will create a preview icon for it. If the file is 1.1 MB in size, &konqueror; will not make a preview, even if the protocol is enabled. + +You can turn on and off previews on the fly from within &konqueror;, using the View menu. For example, if you normally want to see image previews on every protocol but find a particular server is very slow to send you the data, you might turn it off for the present, and turn it on again later. + +You may also like to enable the checkbox Increase size of previews relative to icons, in order to see more information in the thumbnails. + +Many image files already contain a thumbnail. You can enable the Use thumbnails embedded in files to make use of these. This will save time waiting for thumbnails to be created when viewing a folder full of images you have not previously seen in &konqueror;. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook index 700fdf00682..39a0fa18995 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/filetypes/index.docbook @@ -2,270 +2,129 @@ - + ]>
-File Associations +File Associations -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-13 -3.2 +2003-10-13 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -files association -association +KDE +KControl +files association +association -File Associations +File Associations -Introduction +Introduction -One of the most convenient aspects of &kde;, is its ability to automatically match a data file, with its application. As an example, when you click on your favourite &kword; document in &konqueror;, &kde; automatically starts &kword;, and automatically loads that file into &kword; so you can begin working on it. +One of the most convenient aspects of &kde;, is its ability to automatically match a data file, with its application. As an example, when you click on your favourite &kword; document in &konqueror;, &kde; automatically starts &kword;, and automatically loads that file into &kword; so you can begin working on it. -In the example above, the &kword; Data file is associated with &kword; (the application). These file associations are crucial to the functioning of &kde;. +In the example above, the &kword; Data file is associated with &kword; (the application). These file associations are crucial to the functioning of &kde;. -When &kde; is installed, it automatically creates hundreds of file associations to many of the most common data types. These initial associations are based on the most commonly included software, and the most common user preferences. +When &kde; is installed, it automatically creates hundreds of file associations to many of the most common data types. These initial associations are based on the most commonly included software, and the most common user preferences. -Unfortunately, &kde; can not: +Unfortunately, &kde; can not: -predict every possible combination of software and data files -prepare for file formats not yet invented -or predict everyone's favourite application for certain file formats +predict every possible combination of software and data files +prepare for file formats not yet invented +or predict everyone's favourite application for certain file formats -You can change your current file associations or add new file associations using this module. +You can change your current file associations or add new file associations using this module. -Each file association is recorded as a mime type. &MIME; stands for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. It allows a computer to determine the type of file, without opening and analysing the format of each and every file. +Each file association is recorded as a mime type. &MIME; stands for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. It allows a computer to determine the type of file, without opening and analysing the format of each and every file. -How to use this module +How to use this module -The file associations are organised into several categories, and at a minimum you will have: +The file associations are organised into several categories, and at a minimum you will have: -Application -Audio -Image -Inode -Message -Multipart -Print -Text -Video +Application +Audio +Image +Inode +Message +Multipart +Print +Text +Video -All of the file associations are sorted into one of these categories. +All of the file associations are sorted into one of these categories. -There is also an overview category All, which displays all the file types in one list, without categorising them. +There is also an overview category All, which displays all the file types in one list, without categorising them. -There is no functional difference between any of the categories. These categories are designed to help organise your file associations, but they do not alter the associations in any way. +There is no functional difference between any of the categories. These categories are designed to help organise your file associations, but they do not alter the associations in any way. -The categories are listed in the box labelled Known Types. +The categories are listed in the box labelled Known Types. -You can explore each of these categories, and see the file associations contained within each one, by simply double-clicking on the category name. You will be presented with a list of the associated mime-types under that category. +You can explore each of these categories, and see the file associations contained within each one, by simply double-clicking on the category name. You will be presented with a list of the associated mime-types under that category. -You can also search for a particular &MIME; type by using the search box. The search box is labelled Find filename pattern and is located above the category list. +You can also search for a particular &MIME; type by using the search box. The search box is labelled Find filename pattern and is located above the category list. -Simply type the first letter of the &MIME; type you are interested in. The categories are automatically expanded, and only the mime-types that include that letter are displayed. +Simply type the first letter of the &MIME; type you are interested in. The categories are automatically expanded, and only the mime-types that include that letter are displayed. -You can then enter a second character and the mime-types will be further limited to mime types containing those two characters. +You can then enter a second character and the mime-types will be further limited to mime types containing those two characters. -Adding a new mime type - -If you want to add a new &MIME; type to your file associations, you can click on the Add... button. A small dialogue box will appear. You select the category from the drop down box, and type the &MIME; name in the blank labelled Type name. Click OK to add the new mime type, or click Cancel to not add any new mime-types. +Adding a new mime type + +If you want to add a new &MIME; type to your file associations, you can click on the Add... button. A small dialogue box will appear. You select the category from the drop down box, and type the &MIME; name in the blank labelled Type name. Click OK to add the new mime type, or click Cancel to not add any new mime-types. -Removing a mime type +Removing a mime type -If you want to remove a &MIME; type, simply select the &MIME; type you want to delete by clicking once with the mouse on the &MIME; type name. Then click the button labelled Remove. The &MIME; type will be deleted immediately. +If you want to remove a &MIME; type, simply select the &MIME; type you want to delete by clicking once with the mouse on the &MIME; type name. Then click the button labelled Remove. The &MIME; type will be deleted immediately. -Editing a mime types properties +Editing a mime types properties -Before you can edit a &MIME; types property, you must first specify which &MIME; type. Simply browse through the categories until you find the &MIME; type you want to edit, then click once on it with the mouse. +Before you can edit a &MIME; types property, you must first specify which &MIME; type. Simply browse through the categories until you find the &MIME; type you want to edit, then click once on it with the mouse. -As soon as you have selected the &MIME; type, the current values of the &MIME; type will appear in the module window. +As soon as you have selected the &MIME; type, the current values of the &MIME; type will appear in the module window. -You will notice the current values are split into two tabs: General and Embedding +You will notice the current values are split into two tabs: General and Embedding -General +General -There are 4 properties for each &MIME; type in this tab: +There are 4 properties for each &MIME; type in this tab: -Mime Type Icon is the icon that will be visible when using &konqueror; as a file manager. -Filename Patterns is a search pattern which &kde; will use to determine the &MIME; type. -Description is a short description of the file type. This is for your benefit only. -Application Preference Order determines which applications will be associated with the specified &MIME; type. +Mime Type Icon is the icon that will be visible when using &konqueror; as a file manager. +Filename Patterns is a search pattern which &kde; will use to determine the &MIME; type. +Description is a short description of the file type. This is for your benefit only. +Application Preference Order determines which applications will be associated with the specified &MIME; type. -Embedding Tab +Embedding Tab -The Embedding tab allows you to determine if an file will be viewed within a &konqueror; window, or by starting the application. +The Embedding tab allows you to determine if an file will be viewed within a &konqueror; window, or by starting the application. @@ -273,211 +132,83 @@ -Changing the Icon +Changing the Icon -To change the icon, simply click on the Icon button. A dialogue box will appear, which will show you all available icons. Simply click once with the mouse on the icon of your choice, and click OK. +To change the icon, simply click on the Icon button. A dialogue box will appear, which will show you all available icons. Simply click once with the mouse on the icon of your choice, and click OK. -Editing the mime-type patterns - -The box labelled Filename Patterns, determines what files will be included within this mime-type. - -Usually, files are selected based on their suffix. (Examples: Files that end with .wav are sound files, using the WAV format and files that end in .c are program files written in C). - -You should enter your filename mask in this combo box. - -The asterisk (*) is a wildcard character that will be used with nearly every mime type mask. A complete discussion of wildcards is beyond the scope of this manual, but it is important to understand that the asterisk (in this context), matches any number of characters. As an example: *.pdf will match Datafile.pdf, Graphics.pdf and User.pdf, but not PDF, Datafile.PDF, or .pdf. - -It is very beneficial to have multiple masks. One for lower case, one for upper case, &etc; This will help ensure that &kde; can determine the file type more accurately. +Editing the mime-type patterns + +The box labelled Filename Patterns, determines what files will be included within this mime-type. + +Usually, files are selected based on their suffix. (Examples: Files that end with .wav are sound files, using the WAV format and files that end in .c are program files written in C). + +You should enter your filename mask in this combo box. + +The asterisk (*) is a wildcard character that will be used with nearly every mime type mask. A complete discussion of wildcards is beyond the scope of this manual, but it is important to understand that the asterisk (in this context), matches any number of characters. As an example: *.pdf will match Datafile.pdf, Graphics.pdf and User.pdf, but not PDF, Datafile.PDF, or .pdf. + +It is very beneficial to have multiple masks. One for lower case, one for upper case, &etc; This will help ensure that &kde; can determine the file type more accurately. -Editing a mime types description. +Editing a mime types description. -You can type a short description of the &MIME; type in the text box labelled Description. This label is to help you, it does not affect the function of the &MIME; type. +You can type a short description of the &MIME; type in the text box labelled Description. This label is to help you, it does not affect the function of the &MIME; type. -Editing the application associations - -There are four buttons (Move Up, Move Down, Add and Remove) and a combo box (which lists the applications) which are used to configure the applications. - -The combo box lists all of the applications associated with a specific &MIME; type. The list is in a specific order. The top application is the first application tried. The next application down the list is the second, etc. - -What do you mean there is more than one application per &MIME; type? Why is this necessary? - -We started out by saying that &kde; comes preconfigured with hundreds of file associations. The reality is, each system that &kde; is installed on has a different selection of applications. By allowing multiple associations per &MIME; type, &kde; can continue to operate when a certain application is not installed on the system. - -As an example: -For the &MIME; type pdf, there are two applications associated with this file type. The first program is called PS Viewer. If your system does not have PS Viewer installed, then &kde; automatically starts the second application Adobe Acrobat Reader. As you can see, this will help keep &kde; running strong as you add and subtract applications. - -We have established that the order is important. You can change the order of the applications by clicking once with the mouse on the application you want to move, and then clicking either Move Up or Move Down. This will shift the currently selected application up or down the list of applications. - -You can add new applications to the list by clicking the button labelled Add. A dialogue box will appear. Using the dialogue box, you can select the application you want to use for this mime type. Click OK when you are done, and the application will be added to the current list. - -You can remove an application (thereby ensuring that the application will never run with this &MIME; type by clicking once on the name of the application, and clicking the Remove button. - -It is a good idea to use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to adjust the unwanted application to a lower position in the list, rather than deleting the application from the list entirely. Once you have deleted an application, if your preferred application should become compromised, there will not be an application to view the data document. +Editing the application associations + +There are four buttons (Move Up, Move Down, Add and Remove) and a combo box (which lists the applications) which are used to configure the applications. + +The combo box lists all of the applications associated with a specific &MIME; type. The list is in a specific order. The top application is the first application tried. The next application down the list is the second, etc. + +What do you mean there is more than one application per &MIME; type? Why is this necessary? + +We started out by saying that &kde; comes preconfigured with hundreds of file associations. The reality is, each system that &kde; is installed on has a different selection of applications. By allowing multiple associations per &MIME; type, &kde; can continue to operate when a certain application is not installed on the system. + +As an example: +For the &MIME; type pdf, there are two applications associated with this file type. The first program is called PS Viewer. If your system does not have PS Viewer installed, then &kde; automatically starts the second application Adobe Acrobat Reader. As you can see, this will help keep &kde; running strong as you add and subtract applications. + +We have established that the order is important. You can change the order of the applications by clicking once with the mouse on the application you want to move, and then clicking either Move Up or Move Down. This will shift the currently selected application up or down the list of applications. + +You can add new applications to the list by clicking the button labelled Add. A dialogue box will appear. Using the dialogue box, you can select the application you want to use for this mime type. Click OK when you are done, and the application will be added to the current list. + +You can remove an application (thereby ensuring that the application will never run with this &MIME; type by clicking once on the name of the application, and clicking the Remove button. + +It is a good idea to use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to adjust the unwanted application to a lower position in the list, rather than deleting the application from the list entirely. Once you have deleted an application, if your preferred application should become compromised, there will not be an application to view the data document. -Embedding -By clicking on the Embedding tab, you are presented with three radio buttons in the Left click action group. These determine how &konqueror; views the selected &MIME; type: +Embedding +By clicking on the Embedding tab, you are presented with three radio buttons in the Left click action group. These determine how &konqueror; views the selected &MIME; type: -Show file in embedded viewer -If this is selected, the file will be shown within the &konqueror; window. -Show file in separate viewer -This will cause a separate window to be created when showing this mime-type. -Use group settings. -This will cause the mime-type to use the settings for the mime-type group. (if you are editing an audio mime type, then the settings for the audio group are used). +Show file in embedded viewer +If this is selected, the file will be shown within the &konqueror; window. +Show file in separate viewer +This will cause a separate window to be created when showing this mime-type. +Use group settings. +This will cause the mime-type to use the settings for the mime-type group. (if you are editing an audio mime type, then the settings for the audio group are used). -Below this is a listbox labelled Services Preference Order. - -When you are in &konqueror;, you can right mouse click, and a menu will with an entry labelled Preview with... will appear. This box lists the applications that will appear, in the order they will appear, under this menu. - -You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order. +Below this is a listbox labelled Services Preference Order. + +When you are in &konqueror;, you can right mouse click, and a menu will with an entry labelled Preview with... will appear. This box lists the applications that will appear, in the order they will appear, under this menu. + +You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order. -Making changes permanent +Making changes permanent -When you are done making any changes to mime types, you can click Apply to make your changes permanent, but keep you in this module. +When you are done making any changes to mime types, you can click Apply to make your changes permanent, but keep you in this module. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook index a379b8d94a2..ac3b120830d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/fonts/index.docbook @@ -2,171 +2,74 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -fonts +KDE +KControl +fonts -Fonts +Fonts -This module is designed to allow you to easily select different fonts for different parts of the &kde; Desktop. +This module is designed to allow you to easily select different fonts for different parts of the &kde; Desktop. -The panel consists of different font groups to give you a lot of flexibility in configuring your fonts: +The panel consists of different font groups to give you a lot of flexibility in configuring your fonts: -General: Used everywhere the other font groups do not apply - -Fixed width: Anywhere a non-proportional font is specified - - - -Toolbar: Font used in &kde; application toolbars - -Menu: Font used in &kde; application menus - -Window title: Font used in the window title - -Taskbar: Font used in the taskbar panel applet - -Desktop: Font used on the desktop to label icons +General: Used everywhere the other font groups do not apply + +Fixed width: Anywhere a non-proportional font is specified + + + +Toolbar: Font used in &kde; application toolbars + +Menu: Font used in &kde; application menus + +Window title: Font used in the window title + +Taskbar: Font used in the taskbar panel applet + +Desktop: Font used on the desktop to label icons -Each font has a corresponding Choose... button. By clicking on this button, a dialogue box appears. You can use this dialogue box to choose a new font, font style, size and character set. Then press OK. - -An example of the font you have chosen will be displayed in the space between the font group name and the choose button. - -When you are done, simply click OK, and all necessary components of &kde; will be restarted so your changes can take affect immediately. - -The Adjust All Fonts... button allows you to quickly set properties for all the fonts selected above. A font selection dialogue similar to the standard one will appear, but you will notice checkboxes that allow you to change the Font, Font style or Size independently of each other. You can choose any one, two, or three of these options, and they will be applied to all the font groups. - -For example, if you have selected several different font faces above, and realise they are all a size too big (this often happens when you change screen resolution, for instance), you can apply a new font size to all the fonts, without affecting your customised font faces and styles. +Each font has a corresponding Choose... button. By clicking on this button, a dialogue box appears. You can use this dialogue box to choose a new font, font style, size and character set. Then press OK. + +An example of the font you have chosen will be displayed in the space between the font group name and the choose button. + +When you are done, simply click OK, and all necessary components of &kde; will be restarted so your changes can take affect immediately. + +The Adjust All Fonts... button allows you to quickly set properties for all the fonts selected above. A font selection dialogue similar to the standard one will appear, but you will notice checkboxes that allow you to change the Font, Font style or Size independently of each other. You can choose any one, two, or three of these options, and they will be applied to all the font groups. + +For example, if you have selected several different font faces above, and realise they are all a size too big (this often happens when you change screen resolution, for instance), you can apply a new font size to all the fonts, without affecting your customised font faces and styles. -Anti-alias text - -To use anti-aliasing, simply place a mark in the checkbox labelled Use anti-aliasing for fonts. This enables two more options. -Placing a mark in the checkbox will allow you to specify which range of fonts will not be anti-aliased. This range is specified with the two combo boxes on the same line. - -You can also choose the method that &kde; uses to create an anti-alias look to your fonts. If you are not familiar with the individual methods, you should leave this option alone. - -The ability to use anti-aliased fonts and icons requires that you have support in both X and the &Qt; toolkit, that you have suitable fonts installed, and that you are using the built-in font serving capabilities of the X server. If you still are having problems, please contact the appropriate &kde; mailing list, or check the FAQ. +Anti-alias text + +To use anti-aliasing, simply place a mark in the checkbox labelled Use anti-aliasing for fonts. This enables two more options. +Placing a mark in the checkbox will allow you to specify which range of fonts will not be anti-aliased. This range is specified with the two combo boxes on the same line. + +You can also choose the method that &kde; uses to create an anti-alias look to your fonts. If you are not familiar with the individual methods, you should leave this option alone. + +The ability to use anti-aliased fonts and icons requires that you have support in both X and the &Qt; toolkit, that you have suitable fonts installed, and that you are using the built-in font serving capabilities of the X server. If you still are having problems, please contact the appropriate &kde; mailing list, or check the FAQ. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook index d9a4ee29875..62a141f1118 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/helpindex/index.docbook @@ -2,214 +2,83 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; - -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; + +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2002-10-17 -3.1 +2002-10-17 +3.1 -KDE -KControl -Help Index -Index +KDE +KControl +Help Index +Index -Help Index - -At the time of writing, for most installations of &kde; the entire search engine function in &khelpcenter; is disabled, and settings made in this &kcontrol; module will have no effect. We hope to have it back in a future release. - -&kde; comes with a lot of documentation for applications and components. While it is possible to just browse the manuals until you find that piece of information you're looking for, this may be a very time-consuming task. To make this easier for you, &kde; offers fulltext search using a program called ht://dig. It works quite similar to search engines on the web, in fact some search engines you now might even use it. Just click on the Search tab in the &khelpcenter;, enter the word you are looking for, click Search and enjoy! - -However, to make use of this feature, ht://dig has to be installed on your system and &kde; has to be configured to make us of it. This control module tries to help you doing the latter. If you haven't installed ht://dig and it wasn't shipped with your operating system you have to get ht://dig yourself. Have a look at the ht://dig homepage on how to download and install it. - -When you first start, you are in display mode only. To modify your settings, click on Administrator Mode. If you are logged in as root, you will go straight to the change dialogue. If not, &kde; will ask for a superuser password. - - -Use - -There are two important things to tell &kde; so it can make use of the fulltext search engine: +Help Index + +At the time of writing, for most installations of &kde; the entire search engine function in &khelpcenter; is disabled, and settings made in this &kcontrol; module will have no effect. We hope to have it back in a future release. + +&kde; comes with a lot of documentation for applications and components. While it is possible to just browse the manuals until you find that piece of information you're looking for, this may be a very time-consuming task. To make this easier for you, &kde; offers fulltext search using a program called ht://dig. It works quite similar to search engines on the web, in fact some search engines you now might even use it. Just click on the Search tab in the &khelpcenter;, enter the word you are looking for, click Search and enjoy! + +However, to make use of this feature, ht://dig has to be installed on your system and &kde; has to be configured to make us of it. This control module tries to help you doing the latter. If you haven't installed ht://dig and it wasn't shipped with your operating system you have to get ht://dig yourself. Have a look at the ht://dig homepage on how to download and install it. + +When you first start, you are in display mode only. To modify your settings, click on Administrator Mode. If you are logged in as root, you will go straight to the change dialogue. If not, &kde; will ask for a superuser password. + + +Use + +There are two important things to tell &kde; so it can make use of the fulltext search engine: -where to find the ht://dig programs KDE uses for fulltext search -where to search +where to find the ht://dig programs KDE uses for fulltext search +where to search -The <application ->ht://dig</application -> Programs - -There are three programs &kde; needs that come with ht://dig: htdig, htsearch and htmerge. For each program you have to provide the full path including the program name, for example: /usr/bin/htdig. - -Where exactly these programs are installed depends on your operating system or your distribution. However, there are some good guesses you might want to try: +The <application>ht://dig</application> Programs + +There are three programs &kde; needs that come with ht://dig: htdig, htsearch and htmerge. For each program you have to provide the full path including the program name, for example: /usr/bin/htdig. + +Where exactly these programs are installed depends on your operating system or your distribution. However, there are some good guesses you might want to try: -htdig and htmerge are often found in /usr/bin/ or in something like /usr/local/www/htdig/bin/. - -the htsearch command is often found in a sub folder called cgi-bin, for example /usr/local/httpd/cgi-bin/. +htdig and htmerge are often found in /usr/bin/ or in something like /usr/local/www/htdig/bin/. + +the htsearch command is often found in a sub folder called cgi-bin, for example /usr/local/httpd/cgi-bin/. -To find out where for example htdig is installed you can always type whereis htdig on the console. whereis will look for the specified command in the standard execution path folders. However, folders like cgi-bin are often not in the standard execution path. +To find out where for example htdig is installed you can always type whereis htdig on the console. whereis will look for the specified command in the standard execution path folders. However, folders like cgi-bin are often not in the standard execution path. -Scope and Search Paths - -In this section you can choose which help resources should be indexed, &ie; made available to the search engine. - -In the Scope frame you can select some typical resources you want to be indexed, &ie; the &kde; help files, and the information offered by the man and info commands. Note that some of those may still be disabled, which means that support for them has not been added yet. - -Maybe you have additional files you want to access using the &khelpcenter; fulltext search feature. For example, you might have an HTML reference installed in /home/jdoe/docs/selfhtml. By adding this path to the list of additional search paths you make this documentation available to &khelpcenter;'s fulltext search, too. Just click on the Add button and a file dialogue will ask you for an additional search folder. Select /home/jdoe/docs/selfhtml and click OK. To remove an additional search path, just select it and click Delete. - -Your changes to the scope and additional search paths will not take effect if you don't click on the Build index button. +Scope and Search Paths + +In this section you can choose which help resources should be indexed, &ie; made available to the search engine. + +In the Scope frame you can select some typical resources you want to be indexed, &ie; the &kde; help files, and the information offered by the man and info commands. Note that some of those may still be disabled, which means that support for them has not been added yet. + +Maybe you have additional files you want to access using the &khelpcenter; fulltext search feature. For example, you might have an HTML reference installed in /home/jdoe/docs/selfhtml. By adding this path to the list of additional search paths you make this documentation available to &khelpcenter;'s fulltext search, too. Just click on the Add button and a file dialogue will ask you for an additional search folder. Select /home/jdoe/docs/selfhtml and click OK. To remove an additional search path, just select it and click Delete. + +Your changes to the scope and additional search paths will not take effect if you don't click on the Build index button. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook index eb875630a9e..058866d77f6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/icons/index.docbook @@ -2,305 +2,137 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -icon +KDE +KControl +icon -Icons +Icons -Introduction +Introduction -&kde; comes with a full set of icons in several sizes. These icons are being used all over &kde;: the desktop, the panel, the &konqueror; file manager, in every toolbar of every &kde; application, etc. The icons control module offers you very flexible ways of customising the way &kde; handles icons. You can: +&kde; comes with a full set of icons in several sizes. These icons are being used all over &kde;: the desktop, the panel, the &konqueror; file manager, in every toolbar of every &kde; application, etc. The icons control module offers you very flexible ways of customising the way &kde; handles icons. You can: -install and choose icon themes -choose different icon sizes -assign effects to icons (for example make them semi-transparent or colourise them) -configure these settings for each of the different places icons will be used in: for example the desktop, toolbars &etc; +install and choose icon themes +choose different icon sizes +assign effects to icons (for example make them semi-transparent or colourise them) +configure these settings for each of the different places icons will be used in: for example the desktop, toolbars &etc; -Please note that some of these settings may depend on your selected icon theme. &kde; comes with two icon themes by default, &kde;-Classic (HiColour) and Crystal SVG. There is also a low colour theme in the tdeartwork package, along with others. +Please note that some of these settings may depend on your selected icon theme. &kde; comes with two icon themes by default, &kde;-Classic (HiColour) and Crystal SVG. There is also a low colour theme in the tdeartwork package, along with others. -<guilabel ->Theme</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Theme</guilabel> -Starting at the top, you can see some example icons. These change in appearance depending on the icon theme you select. Most default installations will have only one icon theme available, the &kde; default Crystal SVG theme. There are others contained separately in the tdeartwork package, and you can download more from the Internet. +Starting at the top, you can see some example icons. These change in appearance depending on the icon theme you select. Most default installations will have only one icon theme available, the &kde; default Crystal SVG theme. There are others contained separately in the tdeartwork package, and you can download more from the Internet. -Use the Install New Theme... to browse to the location of newly downloaded themes, and they will then become available to select from above. +Use the Install New Theme... to browse to the location of newly downloaded themes, and they will then become available to select from above. -Advanced - -Looking at this second page of the icons control module, you will see two areas: - - - -An area labelled Use of Icon. Here you can choose which particular usage of icons you want to configure, for example Toolbar or Panel. - - - A preview area where you can see how icons of the selected kind will look using the current settings. Note that the state of this preview also depends on the icon state selected in the effects below (do not worry about that now, we will explain that below). +Advanced + +Looking at this second page of the icons control module, you will see two areas: + + + +An area labelled Use of Icon. Here you can choose which particular usage of icons you want to configure, for example Toolbar or Panel. + + + A preview area where you can see how icons of the selected kind will look using the current settings. Note that the state of this preview also depends on the icon state selected in the effects below (do not worry about that now, we will explain that below). -When you want to configure icons, first select the usage of icons you want to configure. Change the settings until you like the preview. You can then choose a different icon usage and configure that. At the end, if you are satisfied with your settings, click OK or Apply to take the changes in effect. +When you want to configure icons, first select the usage of icons you want to configure. Change the settings until you like the preview. You can then choose a different icon usage and configure that. At the end, if you are satisfied with your settings, click OK or Apply to take the changes in effect. -There are two further options to consider, Size and Effects. +There are two further options to consider, Size and Effects. -Icon Size - -You have two options relating to icon sizes. First, you can choose from a list of icon sizes. Second, you can tell &kde; to draw all pixels using double sized pixels. The largest icon sizes are especially useful for visually impaired people. - -Which sizes will be offered by the icon size listbox depends on the icon theme you have selected in the icon themes control module. For example, the low colour icon theme only offers the sizes 16 and 32 for desktop icons and 16, 22 and 32 for toolbar icons. The HiColour theme offers icon sizes 16, 32 and 48 as well as sizes from 64 to 128. However, as &kde; can not have all these icon sizes in store, icons using size 64 to 128 will be automatically generated which may result in a loss of quality. - -If the icon sizes offered by your chosen icon theme are not enough for you, there is still the option Double-sized pixels. If this option is selected, all icons will have double sized pixels, &ie; a 2x2 block instead of normal pixels. While this makes it possible to achieve very large icon sizes, the quality is poor: icons will look blocky, an effect you may remember if you've grown up using a Sinclair ZX Spectrum or similar. If this is an option for you, using the large sizes offered by &kde;'s HiColour icon theme will always result in a much better quality than using the low colour icon theme with double sized pixels. +Icon Size + +You have two options relating to icon sizes. First, you can choose from a list of icon sizes. Second, you can tell &kde; to draw all pixels using double sized pixels. The largest icon sizes are especially useful for visually impaired people. + +Which sizes will be offered by the icon size listbox depends on the icon theme you have selected in the icon themes control module. For example, the low colour icon theme only offers the sizes 16 and 32 for desktop icons and 16, 22 and 32 for toolbar icons. The HiColour theme offers icon sizes 16, 32 and 48 as well as sizes from 64 to 128. However, as &kde; can not have all these icon sizes in store, icons using size 64 to 128 will be automatically generated which may result in a loss of quality. + +If the icon sizes offered by your chosen icon theme are not enough for you, there is still the option Double-sized pixels. If this option is selected, all icons will have double sized pixels, &ie; a 2x2 block instead of normal pixels. While this makes it possible to achieve very large icon sizes, the quality is poor: icons will look blocky, an effect you may remember if you've grown up using a Sinclair ZX Spectrum or similar. If this is an option for you, using the large sizes offered by &kde;'s HiColour icon theme will always result in a much better quality than using the low colour icon theme with double sized pixels. -You can also choose animated icons. Many of the icons have animations associated with them. Enable the checkbox labelled Animate Icons, to enable this effect, but note that it may appear slow or jerky if your graphics card is old or you are low on memory. +You can also choose animated icons. Many of the icons have animations associated with them. Enable the checkbox labelled Animate Icons, to enable this effect, but note that it may appear slow or jerky if your graphics card is old or you are low on memory. -Effects +Effects -Finally you can configure certain filters to be applied on icons which are in one of three states: +Finally you can configure certain filters to be applied on icons which are in one of three states: -Default -This is how the icon will look normally. +Default +This is how the icon will look normally. -Active: -This is how the icon will look when the mouse cursor is over the icon. +Active: +This is how the icon will look when the mouse cursor is over the icon. -Disabled: -This is how the icon will look if its corresponding action is disabled, &ie; clicking on it will not lead to any result. +Disabled: +This is how the icon will look if its corresponding action is disabled, &ie; clicking on it will not lead to any result. -Select one of these states, and press the Set Effect... button to configure a corresponding icon effect. Please note that this configuration will only affect icons of the currently selected Use of Icon category (see above): configuring an effect for active icons, while Toolbar icon usage is selected, will not affect active icons used in other places. - -Below the list of icon states there are two options: you can configure an effect and you can select the Semi-transparent option, which will make the background shine through the icon. To the right of the effects list box there's a setup button to pass additional parameters to a filter. - -The following effects can be applied to icons: +Select one of these states, and press the Set Effect... button to configure a corresponding icon effect. Please note that this configuration will only affect icons of the currently selected Use of Icon category (see above): configuring an effect for active icons, while Toolbar icon usage is selected, will not affect active icons used in other places. + +Below the list of icon states there are two options: you can configure an effect and you can select the Semi-transparent option, which will make the background shine through the icon. To the right of the effects list box there's a setup button to pass additional parameters to a filter. + +The following effects can be applied to icons: -No Effect: -Icons will be used without applying any effect. +No Effect: +Icons will be used without applying any effect. -To Grey: -This filter will apply a greyish look to the icon. Click Setup... to configure the intensity of this filter. Note that it is customary for most user interfaces to use this effect for disabled icons only. +To Grey: +This filter will apply a greyish look to the icon. Click Setup... to configure the intensity of this filter. Note that it is customary for most user interfaces to use this effect for disabled icons only. -Colourise: -Icons will be coloured using a custom colour. For example, you may configure active icons (&ie; the icon the mouse cursor is over) to shine golden. Click Setup... to configure the used colour and the intensity of the colouring. +Colourise: +Icons will be coloured using a custom colour. For example, you may configure active icons (&ie; the icon the mouse cursor is over) to shine golden. Click Setup... to configure the used colour and the intensity of the colouring. -Gamma: -A different gamma value will be applied to all icons. If you're no photographer and don't know what Gamma is: it's quite similar to what people call contrast. Just play around with the gamma settings by clicking on Setup... to get a feeling for this effect. +Gamma: +A different gamma value will be applied to all icons. If you're no photographer and don't know what Gamma is: it's quite similar to what people call contrast. Just play around with the gamma settings by clicking on Setup... to get a feeling for this effect. -Desaturate: -Icons will be drawn desaturated. This is quite similar to the Colour setting on your television. Click Setup... to configure the amount of desaturation. +Desaturate: +Icons will be drawn desaturated. This is quite similar to the Colour setting on your television. Click Setup... to configure the amount of desaturation. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook index b599c16d500..9e4982aac59 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/index.docbook @@ -2,233 +2,126 @@ - + ]> -The &kcontrolcenter; +The &kcontrolcenter; -Michael McBride
mpmcbride7@yahoo.com
 +Michael McBride
mpmcbride7@yahoo.com
 -&FDLNotice; +&FDLNotice; -2002-02-02 -3.00.00 +2002-02-02 +3.00.00 -This documentation describes &kde;'s control centre. +This documentation describes &kde;'s control centre. -KDE -kcontrol -configuration -settings -module +KDE +kcontrol +configuration +settings +module -The &kcontrolcenter; +The &kcontrolcenter; -The &kcontrolcenter; (from now on referred to simply as the control centre) provides you with a centralised and convenient way to configure all of your &kde; settings. +The &kcontrolcenter; (from now on referred to simply as the control centre) provides you with a centralised and convenient way to configure all of your &kde; settings. -The control centre is made up of multiple modules. Each module is a separate application, but the control centre organises all of these programs into a convenient location. +The control centre is made up of multiple modules. Each module is a separate application, but the control centre organises all of these programs into a convenient location. -Each control centre module can be executed individually +Each control centre module can be executed individually -See section entitled Running individual control centre modules for more information. +See section entitled Running individual control centre modules for more information. -The control centre groups the configuration modules into categories, so they are easy to locate. Within each category, the control centre shows all the modules in a list, so it is easier to find the right configuration module. +The control centre groups the configuration modules into categories, so they are easy to locate. Within each category, the control centre shows all the modules in a list, so it is easier to find the right configuration module. -Using The &kcontrolcenter; +Using The &kcontrolcenter; -This next section details the use of the control centre itself. For information on individual modules, please see Control Centre Modules +This next section details the use of the control centre itself. For information on individual modules, please see Control Centre Modules -Starting the &kcontrol; +Starting the &kcontrol; -The &kcontrolcenter; can be started 3 ways: +The &kcontrolcenter; can be started 3 ways: - + -By selecting K ButtonControl Centre from the &kde; Panel. +By selecting K ButtonControl Centre from the &kde; Panel. -By pressing &Alt;F2. - -This will bring up a dialogue box. Type kcontrol, and click Run. +By pressing &Alt;F2. + +This will bring up a dialogue box. Type kcontrol, and click Run. -You can type kcontrol & at any command prompt. - - - -All three of these methods are equivalent, and produce the same result. +You can type kcontrol & at any command prompt. + + + +All three of these methods are equivalent, and produce the same result. - -The &kcontrolcenter; Screen + +The &kcontrolcenter; Screen -When you start the control centre, you are presented with a window, which can be divided into 3 functional parts. +When you start the control centre, you are presented with a window, which can be divided into 3 functional parts. -Screenshot +Screenshot - + - Screenshot + Screenshot -The &kde; Control Centre Screen +The &kde; Control Centre Screen - + -Across the top is a menubar. The menubar will provide you with quick access to most of &kcontrolcenter;'s features. The menus are detailed in The &kde; Control Centre Menus. +Across the top is a menubar. The menubar will provide you with quick access to most of &kcontrolcenter;'s features. The menus are detailed in The &kde; Control Centre Menus. -Along the left hand side, is a column. This is a where you choose which module to configure. You can learn how to navigate through the modules in the section called Navigating Modules. +Along the left hand side, is a column. This is a where you choose which module to configure. You can learn how to navigate through the modules in the section called Navigating Modules. -The main panel shows you some system information. +The main panel shows you some system information. -In this example, we are running &kde; 2.99, we started &kcontrolcenter; as user adridg, the computer is named aramis, it is a FreeBSD system, Version 4.4-RELEASE, on a Pentium. +In this example, we are running &kde; 2.99, we started &kcontrolcenter; as user adridg, the computer is named aramis, it is a FreeBSD system, Version 4.4-RELEASE, on a Pentium. -The &kcontrol; Menus +The &kcontrol; Menus -This next section gives you a brief description of what each menu item does. +This next section gives you a brief description of what each menu item does. -<guimenu ->File</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu -The File menu has a single entry. +The File menu has a single entry. - &Ctrl;Q File Quit + &Ctrl;Q File Quit -Closes the control centre. +Closes the control centre. @@ -237,161 +130,75 @@ -<guimenu ->View</guimenu -> Menu - -These options determine how the module selection looks and behaves. - - - -View Mode +<guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu + +These options determine how the module selection looks and behaves. + + + +View Mode -Determines whether to use Tree view, or Icon view for your modules. - -With Tree view, each submenu appears as an indented list. - -With Icon view, when you click on a category, the categories disappear and are replaced with the module list. You then use the up button to return to the categories. +Determines whether to use Tree view, or Icon view for your modules. + +With Tree view, each submenu appears as an indented list. + +With Icon view, when you click on a category, the categories disappear and are replaced with the module list. You then use the up button to return to the categories. - -ViewIcon size + +ViewIcon size -Using this option, you can choose Small, Medium, or Large icons to select your modules. - -This menu item only controls the icon size if you are in Icon View. If you choose Tree View, the Small icon size will be used, no matter what size was previously selected in Icon View. +Using this option, you can choose Small, Medium, or Large icons to select your modules. + +This menu item only controls the icon size if you are in Icon View. If you choose Tree View, the Small icon size will be used, no matter what size was previously selected in Icon View. - - + + -<guimenu ->Modules</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Modules</guimenu> Menu -The modules menu is a shortcut to take you directly to any module in the control centre. +The modules menu is a shortcut to take you directly to any module in the control centre. -<guimenu ->Help</guimenu -> Menu +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu &help.menu.documentation; -Exiting The &kde; Control Centre +Exiting The &kde; Control Centre -You can exit the control centre one of three ways: +You can exit the control centre one of three ways: -Select File Quit from the menu bar. +Select File Quit from the menu bar. -Type &Ctrl;Q on the keyboard. +Type &Ctrl;Q on the keyboard. -Click on the Close button on the frame surrounding the control centre. +Click on the Close button on the frame surrounding the control centre. -Running Individual Modules - -You can run individual modules without running kcontrol by selecting K Button Preferences from the &kde; panel. You can then select the module you want to run in the submenus. +Running Individual Modules + +You can run individual modules without running kcontrol by selecting K Button Preferences from the &kde; panel. You can then select the module you want to run in the submenus. @@ -400,335 +207,186 @@ -The &kcontrol; Modules +The &kcontrol; Modules -In order to make it as easy as possible, the &kcontrol; has organised similar options into groups. Each group is called a module. When you click on the name of a module in the left window, you will be presented with the options of the module on the right. +In order to make it as easy as possible, the &kcontrol; has organised similar options into groups. Each group is called a module. When you click on the name of a module in the left window, you will be presented with the options of the module on the right. -Each module will have some or all of the following buttons: +Each module will have some or all of the following buttons: -Help +Help -This button will give you help specific to the current module. The button will show you a short summary help page in the left window. At the bottom of that window, you can click on a link to get more detailed help. +This button will give you help specific to the current module. The button will show you a short summary help page in the left window. At the bottom of that window, you can click on a link to get more detailed help. -Use Defaults +Use Defaults -This button will restore this module to its default values. You must click OK to save the options. +This button will restore this module to its default values. You must click OK to save the options. -Apply +Apply -Clicking this button will save all changes to &kde;. If you have changed anything, clicking Apply will cause the changes to take effect. +Clicking this button will save all changes to &kde;. If you have changed anything, clicking Apply will cause the changes to take effect. -Reset +Reset -This button will Reset the module. The exact effect will depend on the module. +This button will Reset the module. The exact effect will depend on the module. - + -You must save the options of one module using Apply before you can change to a different module. -If you try to change without saving your options, you will be asked if you want to save your changes, or discard them. +You must save the options of one module using Apply before you can change to a different module. +If you try to change without saving your options, you will be asked if you want to save your changes, or discard them. -Navigating Modules +Navigating Modules -This is a list of the standard configuration modules (sorted by category) provided by the KDE base package. Please note that there may be many more modules on your system if you have installed additional software. +This is a list of the standard configuration modules (sorted by category) provided by the KDE base package. Please note that there may be many more modules on your system if you have installed additional software. +--> @@ -738,189 +396,60 @@ -Laptop Modules Notes - -In order to use the laptop modules, you must have the kernel APM package installed in your kernel. Useful information on how to do this can be found at http://www.cs.utexas.edu/users/kharker/linux-laptop/apm.html and in the Battery Powered Linux mini-HOWTO at http://metalab.unc.edu/LDP/HOWTO/mini/Battery-Powered.html. - -If you want the suspend and standby menu commands to work then you should install the &Linux; apmd package (version 2.4 or later). If you want to use them from non-root accounts you must mark the apm command set uid root. - -To do this, log on as root and enter: - -%chown ;chmod +Laptop Modules Notes + +In order to use the laptop modules, you must have the kernel APM package installed in your kernel. Useful information on how to do this can be found at http://www.cs.utexas.edu/users/kharker/linux-laptop/apm.html and in the Battery Powered Linux mini-HOWTO at http://metalab.unc.edu/LDP/HOWTO/mini/Battery-Powered.html. + +If you want the suspend and standby menu commands to work then you should install the &Linux; apmd package (version 2.4 or later). If you want to use them from non-root accounts you must mark the apm command set uid root. + +To do this, log on as root and enter: + +%chown ;chmod -By doing this you will allow any user of your system to put it into suspend or standby states - if you are the only user, this should not be a problem. - -Also note that any program which has root access, can be a potential security problem. You should carefully determine if there are any security concerns before giving any program root permissions. +By doing this you will allow any user of your system to put it into suspend or standby states - if you are the only user, this should not be a problem. + +Also note that any program which has root access, can be a potential security problem. You should carefully determine if there are any security concerns before giving any program root permissions. -Credits and Licence +Credits and Licence -&kcontrol; -Program copyright 1997-2001 The &kcontrolcenter; Developers -Contributors: +&kcontrol; +Program copyright 1997-2001 The &kcontrolcenter; Developers +Contributors: -Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org -Matthias Elter elter@kde.org +Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org +Matthias Elter elter@kde.org -Documentation copyright 2000 Michael McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com +Documentation copyright 2000 Michael McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com -Contributors: +Contributors: -Paul Campbell paul@taniwha.com -Helge Deller deller@kde.org -Mark Donohoe -Pat Dowler -Duncan Haldane duncan@kde.org -Steffen Hansen stefh@mip.ou.dk. -Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org -Martin Jones mjones@kde.org -Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de -Jonathan Singer jsinger@leeta.net -Thomas Tanghus tanghus@earthling.net -Krishna Tateneni tateneni@pluto.njcc.com -> -Ellis Whitehead ewhitehe@uni-freiburg.de +Paul Campbell paul@taniwha.com +Helge Deller deller@kde.org +Mark Donohoe +Pat Dowler +Duncan Haldane duncan@kde.org +Steffen Hansen stefh@mip.ou.dk. +Matthias Hoelzer-Kluepfel hoelzer@kde.org +Martin Jones mjones@kde.org +Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de +Jonathan Singer jsinger@leeta.net +Thomas Tanghus tanghus@earthling.net +Krishna Tateneni tateneni@pluto.njcc.com> +Ellis Whitehead ewhitehe@uni-freiburg.de -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk &underFDL; &underGPL; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook index 0de44832cbb..d95215e5e29 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmaccess/index.docbook @@ -2,202 +2,82 @@ - + ]>
- -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English + +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-09-01 -3.01.00 +2002-09-01 +3.01.00 -KDE -KControl -accessibility +KDE +KControl +accessibility -Accessibility +Accessibility -Introduction +Introduction -This module is designed to help users who have difficulty hearing audible cues, or who have difficulty using a keyboard. +This module is designed to help users who have difficulty hearing audible cues, or who have difficulty using a keyboard. -The module is divided into two tabs: Bell and Keyboard. +The module is divided into two tabs: Bell and Keyboard. -<guilabel ->Bell</guilabel -> - -This panel is divided into an Audible Bell section and a Visible Bell section. - -The top check box labelled Use System Bell, determines whether the normal System bell rings. If this option is disabled, the System bell will be silenced. - -The next check box down can be used to play a different sound whenever the system bell is triggered. To activate, place a mark in the check box labelled Use customised bell, and enter the complete pathname to the sound file in the text box labelled Sound to Play. If you want, you can select the Browse button to navigate through your filesystem to find the exact file. - -For those users who have difficulty hearing the System bell, or those users who have a silent computer, &kde; offers the visible bell. This provides a visual signal (inverting the screen or flashing a colour across it) when the system bell would normally sound. - -To use the visible bell, first place a mark in the check box labelled Use visible bell. - -You can then select between Invert screen, or Flash screen. If you select Invert screen, all colours on the screen will be reversed. If you choose Flash screen, you can choose the colour by clicking the button to the right of the Flash screen selection. - -The slider bar can be used to adjust the duration of the visible bell. The default value is 500ms, or half a second. +<guilabel>Bell</guilabel> + +This panel is divided into an Audible Bell section and a Visible Bell section. + +The top check box labelled Use System Bell, determines whether the normal System bell rings. If this option is disabled, the System bell will be silenced. + +The next check box down can be used to play a different sound whenever the system bell is triggered. To activate, place a mark in the check box labelled Use customised bell, and enter the complete pathname to the sound file in the text box labelled Sound to Play. If you want, you can select the Browse button to navigate through your filesystem to find the exact file. + +For those users who have difficulty hearing the System bell, or those users who have a silent computer, &kde; offers the visible bell. This provides a visual signal (inverting the screen or flashing a colour across it) when the system bell would normally sound. + +To use the visible bell, first place a mark in the check box labelled Use visible bell. + +You can then select between Invert screen, or Flash screen. If you select Invert screen, all colours on the screen will be reversed. If you choose Flash screen, you can choose the colour by clicking the button to the right of the Flash screen selection. + +The slider bar can be used to adjust the duration of the visible bell. The default value is 500ms, or half a second. -<guilabel ->Keyboard</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel> -There are three sections to this panel. +There are three sections to this panel. -Use Sticky Keys +Use Sticky Keys -If this option is enabled, the user can press and release the &Shift;, &Alt; or &Ctrl; keys, and then press another key to get a key combo (example: &Ctrl; &Alt; Del could be done with &Ctrl; then &Alt; then Del). - -Also in this section is a check box labelled Lock Sticky Keys. If this check box is enabled, the &Alt;, &Ctrl; and &Shift; keys stay selected until they are de-selected by the user. - -As an example: +If this option is enabled, the user can press and release the &Shift;, &Alt; or &Ctrl; keys, and then press another key to get a key combo (example: &Ctrl; &Alt; Del could be done with &Ctrl; then &Alt; then Del). + +Also in this section is a check box labelled Lock Sticky Keys. If this check box is enabled, the &Alt;, &Ctrl; and &Shift; keys stay selected until they are de-selected by the user. + +As an example: -With Lock Sticky Keys disabled: +With Lock Sticky Keys disabled: -The user presses the &Shift; key, then presses the F key. The computer translates this into &Shift;F. Now if the user types a p, the computer interprets this as the letter p (no shift). +The user presses the &Shift; key, then presses the F key. The computer translates this into &Shift;F. Now if the user types a p, the computer interprets this as the letter p (no shift). -With Lock Sticky Keys enabled: +With Lock Sticky Keys enabled: -The user presses the &Shift; key, then presses the F key. The computer translates this into &Shift;F. Now if the user types a p, the computer interprets this as the letter P (&Shift;P). +The user presses the &Shift; key, then presses the F key. The computer translates this into &Shift;F. Now if the user types a p, the computer interprets this as the letter P (&Shift;P). @@ -205,24 +85,16 @@ -Slow keys +Slow keys -If this option is enabled, the user must hold the key down for a specified period of time (adjustable with the slider) before the keystroke will be accepted. This helps prevent accidental key strokes. +If this option is enabled, the user must hold the key down for a specified period of time (adjustable with the slider) before the keystroke will be accepted. This helps prevent accidental key strokes. -Bounce keys +Bounce keys -If this option is enabled, the user must wait a specified delay (configurable with the slider) before the next key press can be accepted. This prevents accidental multiple key strokes. +If this option is enabled, the user must wait a specified delay (configurable with the slider) before the next key press can be accepted. This prevents accidental multiple key strokes. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook index 34b33d4c1d7..48968426957 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmcss/index.docbook @@ -2,134 +2,70 @@ - + ]>
-&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -CSS -Stylesheets -Accessibility +KDE +CSS +Stylesheets +Accessibility -Stylesheets +Stylesheets -Introduction - -CSS style sheets affect the way web pages appear. CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets. - -&kde; can use its own stylesheet, based on simple defaults and the colour scheme you are using for your desktop. &kde; can also use a stylesheet that you have written yourself. Finally, you can specify a stylesheet in this module. The options presented in this module are tuned for accessibility purposes, especially for people with reduced vision. - -Your choices here affect every &kde; application that renders HTML with &kde;'s own renderer, which is called tdehtml. These include &kmail;, &khelpcenter; and of course &konqueror;. Choices here do not affect other browsers such as &Netscape;. - -The module has two pages, General, where you can choose which stylesheet to use, and Customise where you can design an accessibility stylesheet. +Introduction + +CSS style sheets affect the way web pages appear. CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets. + +&kde; can use its own stylesheet, based on simple defaults and the colour scheme you are using for your desktop. &kde; can also use a stylesheet that you have written yourself. Finally, you can specify a stylesheet in this module. The options presented in this module are tuned for accessibility purposes, especially for people with reduced vision. + +Your choices here affect every &kde; application that renders HTML with &kde;'s own renderer, which is called tdehtml. These include &kmail;, &khelpcenter; and of course &konqueror;. Choices here do not affect other browsers such as &Netscape;. + +The module has two pages, General, where you can choose which stylesheet to use, and Customise where you can design an accessibility stylesheet. -General +General -This page contains the following options: +This page contains the following options: -Use default stylesheet +Use default stylesheet -&kde; will use the default stylesheet. Some of the colours will default to those defined in your chosen colour scheme. Most settings are easily overridden by the page you are viewing. +&kde; will use the default stylesheet. Some of the colours will default to those defined in your chosen colour scheme. Most settings are easily overridden by the page you are viewing. -Use user-defined stylesheet +Use user-defined stylesheet -&kde; will use a stylesheet that you have written yourself. You can use the browse button to locate the stylesheet on your system. CSS files traditionally have a .css extension, but this is not required. +&kde; will use a stylesheet that you have written yourself. You can use the browse button to locate the stylesheet on your system. CSS files traditionally have a .css extension, but this is not required. -Use accessibility stylesheet defined in "Customise"-tab +Use accessibility stylesheet defined in "Customise"-tab -Use the settings defined in the Customise tab. Enabling this option will enable the options on the Customise page. +Use the settings defined in the Customise tab. Enabling this option will enable the options on the Customise page. @@ -137,143 +73,84 @@ -Customise +Customise -Here you can set up a user stylesheet. The options available are only a subset of the instructions you can add in a stylesheet, and they are geared towards people with reduced vision, to allow users to create a stylesheet that makes web pages and the &kde; help files more readable. +Here you can set up a user stylesheet. The options available are only a subset of the instructions you can add in a stylesheet, and they are geared towards people with reduced vision, to allow users to create a stylesheet that makes web pages and the &kde; help files more readable. -The options on this page are disabled unless you chose Use accessibility stylesheet defined in "Customise"-tab on the previous page. +The options on this page are disabled unless you chose Use accessibility stylesheet defined in "Customise"-tab on the previous page. -<guilabel ->Font Family</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Font Family</guilabel> -Base family +Base family -Choose a font family to use for body text. +Choose a font family to use for body text. -Use same family for all text +Use same family for all text -If you enable this, then the same font family will be used for all text, regardless of the settings on the page you are viewing. This is useful for pages which have used a decorative or hard to read font for headlines. +If you enable this, then the same font family will be used for all text, regardless of the settings on the page you are viewing. This is useful for pages which have used a decorative or hard to read font for headlines. -Font Size +Font Size -Base Font Size +Base Font Size -This is the default size for text on the page. Many web sites set their font sizes relative to this default, using larger or +1 to make the text bigger, and smaller or -1 to make the text smaller. -Many people design their web pages on platforms where the ordinary default text size is too large for the average user to read, so it is very common to come across web pages that have forced the font smaller in this way. -This setting will allow you to set the default font to a comfortable size, so that the relative sizes are also enlarged enough to be comfortable. -Do not forget you can also have &konqueror; enforce a minimum size, so that text is never too small to read. Set that under Behaviour, in the Web Browser section in &kcontrol;. +This is the default size for text on the page. Many web sites set their font sizes relative to this default, using larger or +1 to make the text bigger, and smaller or -1 to make the text smaller. +Many people design their web pages on platforms where the ordinary default text size is too large for the average user to read, so it is very common to come across web pages that have forced the font smaller in this way. +This setting will allow you to set the default font to a comfortable size, so that the relative sizes are also enlarged enough to be comfortable. +Do not forget you can also have &konqueror; enforce a minimum size, so that text is never too small to read. Set that under Behaviour, in the Web Browser section in &kcontrol;. -Use same size for all elements +Use same size for all elements -If you enable this option, then all text will be rendered at your specified font size, regardless of the instructions the page contains. Relative font sizes as discussed earlier, and even specific instructions that text should be rendered at a certain size will be overridden here. +If you enable this option, then all text will be rendered at your specified font size, regardless of the instructions the page contains. Relative font sizes as discussed earlier, and even specific instructions that text should be rendered at a certain size will be overridden here. -Colours +Colours -Black on White +Black on White -Many people with reduced vision find black text on a white screen gives the most contrast, and is easiest to read. If this applies to you, you can set this here. +Many people with reduced vision find black text on a white screen gives the most contrast, and is easiest to read. If this applies to you, you can set this here. -White on Black +White on Black -Many other people with reduced vision find the opposite to be true, that white text on a black screen is easier to read. +Many other people with reduced vision find the opposite to be true, that white text on a black screen is easier to read. -Custom +Custom -Still other people find that pure black and white, in either order, is difficult to read. You can set custom colours here for both the Background and the Foreground. +Still other people find that pure black and white, in either order, is difficult to read. You can set custom colours here for both the Background and the Foreground. -Use same colour for all text +Use same colour for all text -Many web sites use a different, often contrasting colour for headings or other flourishes. If this interferes with your ability to read the content, you can enable this checkbox to have &kde; use the colours you have set above for all text. +Many web sites use a different, often contrasting colour for headings or other flourishes. If this interferes with your ability to read the content, you can enable this checkbox to have &kde; use the colours you have set above for all text. @@ -281,29 +158,19 @@ -Images +Images -Suppress images +Suppress images -If you do not want to view images, you can turn this off here. +If you do not want to view images, you can turn this off here. -Suppress background images +Suppress background images -One major problem for reduced vision users is that background images do not give sufficient contrast to allow them to read the text. You can disable background images here, independently of your choice above to view all images. +One major problem for reduced vision users is that background images do not give sufficient contrast to allow them to read the text. You can disable background images here, independently of your choice above to view all images. @@ -311,19 +178,13 @@ -Preview +Preview -The Preview allows you to see the effect of your changes. A window will pop up, showing how several types of headings will appear with your stylesheet, and a sentence in the default body text. +The Preview allows you to see the effect of your changes. A window will pop up, showing how several types of headings will appear with your stylesheet, and a sentence in the default body text. -This should allow you to fine tune your stylesheet until you have something that you can comfortably read. +This should allow you to fine tune your stylesheet until you have something that you can comfortably read. -Happy surfing! +Happy surfing! diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook index 882d3a14a6e..f5211c2a084 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmfontinst/index.docbook @@ -2,113 +2,49 @@ - + ]>
-&Craig.Drummond; &Craig.Drummond.Mail; +&Craig.Drummond; &Craig.Drummond.Mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-22 -3.2 +2003-10-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -fonts +KDE +KControl +fonts -Font Installer +Font Installer -This module is responsible for installing (and uninstalling) fonts. The installer will configure X (XFree86), XRender, (anti-aliasing), and Ghostscript (printing), for any TrueType (.ttf) and Type1 (.pfa, .pfb) fonts that you care to install - bitmap (.bdf, .pcf, .snf), and Speedo (.spd), fonts will also be installed, but these can only used by X. +This module is responsible for installing (and uninstalling) fonts. The installer will configure X (XFree86), XRender, (anti-aliasing), and Ghostscript (printing), for any TrueType (.ttf) and Type1 (.pfa, .pfb) fonts that you care to install - bitmap (.bdf, .pcf, .snf), and Speedo (.spd), fonts will also be installed, but these can only used by X. -When the module is started by a normal (non-root) user, then the settings will refer to their personal configuration, and installed fonts will be available to them only. For root, the settings will usually refer to the system-wide configuration, and as such any installed fonts should be available to all users. -If you install fonts as a normal user and notice the fonts used for display (and for print preview) do not match those of the printed output - then you should re-install the fonts system-wide (i.e. as root). This can occur because when printing the output is sent to a printer queue - and when the system comes to actually send the information to the printer, it is running as a different user (usually lp), and cannot find the font files. -To install fonts, simply select the "Add Fonts" button - this will produce a file dialogue, then just locate the fonts to install. Likewise, to remove a font, simply highlight a font and press the "Delete" button. -Fonts may also be "disabled" - this basically just "hides" the font file, so that the font system cannot "see" it. To enable/disable fonts, just highlight the required fonts, and select the "Enable" or "Disable" button. +When the module is started by a normal (non-root) user, then the settings will refer to their personal configuration, and installed fonts will be available to them only. For root, the settings will usually refer to the system-wide configuration, and as such any installed fonts should be available to all users. +If you install fonts as a normal user and notice the fonts used for display (and for print preview) do not match those of the printed output - then you should re-install the fonts system-wide (i.e. as root). This can occur because when printing the output is sent to a printer queue - and when the system comes to actually send the information to the printer, it is running as a different user (usually lp), and cannot find the font files. +To install fonts, simply select the "Add Fonts" button - this will produce a file dialogue, then just locate the fonts to install. Likewise, to remove a font, simply highlight a font and press the "Delete" button. +Fonts may also be "disabled" - this basically just "hides" the font file, so that the font system cannot "see" it. To enable/disable fonts, just highlight the required fonts, and select the "Enable" or "Disable" button. -Using Konqueror -You can also use Konqueror to install fonts via drag-and-drop. To do this just type fonts:/ into Konqueror's Location bar. -As a normal (non-root) user, this will produce 2 top-level folders: +Using Konqueror +You can also use Konqueror to install fonts via drag-and-drop. To do this just type fonts:/ into Konqueror's Location bar. +As a normal (non-root) user, this will produce 2 top-level folders: -Personal - this will display your personal fonts. +Personal - this will display your personal fonts. -System - this will display the system wide fonts. If you drag-n-drop a font on to the folders here, you will be asked for the root password in order to install the font. +System - this will display the system wide fonts. If you drag-n-drop a font on to the folders here, you will be asked for the root password in order to install the font. -If you drop a font over fonts:/, then you will be asked whether this should go into "Personal", or "System". -As root, just the contents of the system font folder will be displayed - as root does not have any "personal" fonts. +If you drop a font over fonts:/, then you will be asked whether this should go into "Personal", or "System". +As root, just the contents of the system font folder will be displayed - as root does not have any "personal" fonts.
diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook index 0626c66b40d..a1dcd8fe5f1 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmkonsole/index.docbook @@ -2,8 +2,7 @@ - + ]>
@@ -11,257 +10,139 @@ -&Jonathan.Singer; &Jonathan.Singer.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Jonathan.Singer; &Jonathan.Singer.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -konsole -terminal +KDE +KControl +konsole +terminal -&konsole; +&konsole; -In this module, you can configure basic settings for &konsole;, the &kde; terminal. You can also easily create new schemata (appearance files) for &konsole;. +In this module, you can configure basic settings for &konsole;, the &kde; terminal. You can also easily create new schemata (appearance files) for &konsole;. -This module contains several tab pages: General, Schema, Session and Write Daemon. +This module contains several tab pages: General, Schema, Session and Write Daemon. -<guilabel ->General</guilabel -> +<guilabel>General</guilabel> -This tab page allows you to configure aspects of &konsole;'s functions. It contains the following options: +This tab page allows you to configure aspects of &konsole;'s functions. It contains the following options: -Use Konsole as default terminal application +Use Konsole as default terminal application -If you wish to have &kde; use another terminal application by default, uncheck this box and enter the preferred application (wterm, rxvt, &etc;) in the text field below. +If you wish to have &kde; use another terminal application by default, uncheck this box and enter the preferred application (wterm, rxvt, &etc;) in the text field below. -Show Terminal Size when Resizing +Show Terminal Size when Resizing -By default, &konsole; will show the size (in characters) of the window when you are resizing, allowing you to make the window a specific size. Uncheck this box to turn off this behaviour. +By default, &konsole; will show the size (in characters) of the window when you are resizing, allowing you to make the window a specific size. Uncheck this box to turn off this behaviour. -Show Frame +Show Frame -Draw an inner frame around the inside of the &konsole; window. +Draw an inner frame around the inside of the &konsole; window. -Confirm quit with open sessions +Confirm quit with open sessions -When set, a warning appears when you try to close a &konsole; window with multiple sessions. +When set, a warning appears when you try to close a &konsole; window with multiple sessions. -Blinking Cursor -If you have trouble spotting the cursor in the &konsole; window, you can have it blink to draw your attention. +Blinking Cursor +If you have trouble spotting the cursor in the &konsole; window, you can have it blink to draw your attention. -Line Spacing -Change the space between lines of text. +Line Spacing +Change the space between lines of text. -Consider the following characters part of a word when double clicking -It is a common &UNIX; behaviour to select a whole word when you double click on it, however, the computer's idea of a word may differ from yours. Add characters here that you would like to be considered always to be part of a word. For example, adding the @ character will allow you to double click to select an entire email address. +Consider the following characters part of a word when double clicking +It is a common &UNIX; behaviour to select a whole word when you double click on it, however, the computer's idea of a word may differ from yours. Add characters here that you would like to be considered always to be part of a word. For example, adding the @ character will allow you to double click to select an entire email address. -Schema +Schema -The Schema page will allow you to easily create, edit and save schemata, with text and background colouring, transparency and background images. +The Schema page will allow you to easily create, edit and save schemata, with text and background colouring, transparency and background images. + ]>
-&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -launch feedback -cursor -busy +KDE +KControl +launch feedback +cursor +busy -Launch Feedback +Launch Feedback -Sometimes it is reassuring to know that your computer didn't just ignore your command, and something is happening behind the scenes. In this module you can configure visible feedback to help you know if you really hit that icon or not. +Sometimes it is reassuring to know that your computer didn't just ignore your command, and something is happening behind the scenes. In this module you can configure visible feedback to help you know if you really hit that icon or not. -The traditional way to indicate that your computer is busy is to modify the cursor, and you can turn this on by choosing a Busy Cursor checkbox. +The traditional way to indicate that your computer is busy is to modify the cursor, and you can turn this on by choosing a Busy Cursor checkbox. -With this option enabled, your cursor will have an icon attached to it for a short time, when a new application is being launched. You can configure how long this icon is displayed beside your cursor with the Startup indication timeout (seconds): spinbox. The default is 30 seconds. +With this option enabled, your cursor will have an icon attached to it for a short time, when a new application is being launched. You can configure how long this icon is displayed beside your cursor with the Startup indication timeout (seconds): spinbox. The default is 30 seconds. -There are several variations of busy cursor available, including a blinking cursor, a bouncing cursor or a passive icon with no animation. +There are several variations of busy cursor available, including a blinking cursor, a bouncing cursor or a passive icon with no animation. -Traditional &kde; launch notification has taken another form, which you can also enable and disable here. Normally when you start an application, it gets an immediate entry in the taskbar, with the icon replaced by a spinning hourglass to let you know something is happening. You can toggle this behaviour on and off with the Enable Taskbar Notification checkbox, and when it's enabled, you can set a time in the Startup indication timeout (seconds): spinbox. +Traditional &kde; launch notification has taken another form, which you can also enable and disable here. Normally when you start an application, it gets an immediate entry in the taskbar, with the icon replaced by a spinning hourglass to let you know something is happening. You can toggle this behaviour on and off with the Enable Taskbar Notification checkbox, and when it's enabled, you can set a time in the Startup indication timeout (seconds): spinbox. -Not all applications that you start will eventually show a window, or an entry in the taskbar. Some of them, for example, are docked into the &kde; system tray. Alternatively, it might be that you sent it off to a different virtual desktop, and Show all windows is unchecked in the &kcontrolcenter; module Taskbar. Setting a timeout ensures that, even in these cases, you can still get launch feedback, but also that it will go away when the job is done. +Not all applications that you start will eventually show a window, or an entry in the taskbar. Some of them, for example, are docked into the &kde; system tray. Alternatively, it might be that you sent it off to a different virtual desktop, and Show all windows is unchecked in the &kcontrolcenter; module Taskbar. Setting a timeout ensures that, even in these cases, you can still get launch feedback, but also that it will go away when the job is done.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook index 7ebe5b1ce1f..3e94eba9142 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmnotify/index.docbook @@ -2,143 +2,69 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -system notification -notification +KDE +KControl +system notification +notification -System Notification Settings +System Notification Settings -&kde;, like all applications, needs to inform the user when a problem occurs, a task is completed, or something has happened. &kde; uses a set of System Notifications to keep the user informed on what is happening. +&kde;, like all applications, needs to inform the user when a problem occurs, a task is completed, or something has happened. &kde; uses a set of System Notifications to keep the user informed on what is happening. -Using this module, you can determine what &kde; does to communicate each event. +Using this module, you can determine what &kde; does to communicate each event. -The panel consists of a large list of specific events which need to be communicated to the user. This list is organised into a tree, so that you can rapidly find the notification you are looking for. +The panel consists of a large list of specific events which need to be communicated to the user. This list is organised into a tree, so that you can rapidly find the notification you are looking for. -To configure a notification, simply click on a group, which will open up a subgroup. You can click on subgroups, which may lead to more subgroups, or it may lead to a list of notifications. +To configure a notification, simply click on a group, which will open up a subgroup. You can click on subgroups, which may lead to more subgroups, or it may lead to a list of notifications. -Once you have found the notification you are looking for, double-click on the notification. +Once you have found the notification you are looking for, double-click on the notification. -You will be presented with 4 options: +You will be presented with 4 options: -Log to file -This will tell &kde; to add the notification to the end of a file. Once you place a mark in front of this option, you can enter a filename at the bottom of the module. If you click on the folder to the right of the blank, you can browse through your filesystem and select the file you want. +Log to file +This will tell &kde; to add the notification to the end of a file. Once you place a mark in front of this option, you can enter a filename at the bottom of the module. If you click on the folder to the right of the blank, you can browse through your filesystem and select the file you want. -Play sound -When this notification is activated, &kde; will play a sound. Once you place a mark in front of this option, you can enter a filename at the bottom of the module. -If you click on the folder to the right of the blank, you can browse through your filesystem and select the file you want. -By clicking the arrow button to the right of the folder button, you can hear the sound. - -Maybe you want to use a special media player to play sound files, ⪚ because you use sound files in a special format or you don't use the &arts; sound daemon. In that case, check the Use external player option and enter the full path and name of the program you want to use into the text field. +Play sound +When this notification is activated, &kde; will play a sound. Once you place a mark in front of this option, you can enter a filename at the bottom of the module. +If you click on the folder to the right of the blank, you can browse through your filesystem and select the file you want. +By clicking the arrow button to the right of the folder button, you can hear the sound. + +Maybe you want to use a special media player to play sound files, ⪚ because you use sound files in a special format or you don't use the &arts; sound daemon. In that case, check the Use external player option and enter the full path and name of the program you want to use into the text field. -Show messagebox -When this notification is activated, a message box appears in the middle of the screen to inform the user of the message. +Show messagebox +When this notification is activated, a message box appears in the middle of the screen to inform the user of the message. -Standard error output -When this notification is activated, the message is sent to the standard output. +Standard error output +When this notification is activated, the message is sent to the standard output. -You are not limited to choosing one option, you can use any combination of these four options for each notification. - -You can turn off (or on) all sounds at once, for all installed applications, with the Enable All Sounds or Disable All Sounds Button. Which of these you see depends on the current status. +You are not limited to choosing one option, you can use any combination of these four options for each notification. + +You can turn off (or on) all sounds at once, for all installed applications, with the Enable All Sounds or Disable All Sounds Button. Which of these you see depends on the current status. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook index 7bac2d4cff6..78f911433ae 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmsmserver/index.docbook @@ -2,149 +2,79 @@ - + ]>
-&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-13 -3.2 +2003-10-13 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -session +KDE +KControl +session -Session Manager +Session Manager -Use +Use -In this control module you can configure &kde;'s session manager. +In this control module you can configure &kde;'s session manager. -Session management refers to &kde;'s ability to save the state of applications and windows when you log out of &kde; and restore them when you log back in. +Session management refers to &kde;'s ability to save the state of applications and windows when you log out of &kde; and restore them when you log back in. -The General section contains one setting: +The General section contains one setting: -Confirm logout +Confirm logout -If this option is checked, when logging out, &kde; will display a dialogue asking for confirmation. In this dialogue you can also choose whether you want to restore your current session when you login the next time. +If this option is checked, when logging out, &kde; will display a dialogue asking for confirmation. In this dialogue you can also choose whether you want to restore your current session when you login the next time. -You may choose one of three options on what should happen when you log into &kde;: +You may choose one of three options on what should happen when you log into &kde;: -Restore previous session -If this option is checked, &kde; will save your current session's state when you logout. &kde; will restore your session on the next login, so you can continue to work with a desktop just like you left it. +Restore previous session +If this option is checked, &kde; will save your current session's state when you logout. &kde; will restore your session on the next login, so you can continue to work with a desktop just like you left it. -Restore manually saved session -Instead of restoring &kde; to the state it was when you logged out last, it will be restored to a specific state that you have saved manually. +Restore manually saved session +Instead of restoring &kde; to the state it was when you logged out last, it will be restored to a specific state that you have saved manually. -Start with an empty session +Start with an empty session -If you choose this option, &kde; will never restore sessions that it has saved. +If you choose this option, &kde; will never restore sessions that it has saved. -You can configure what should happen by default when you log out of &kde;. These options are not possible on all operating systems, and they require the use of &tdm; as your login manager. +You can configure what should happen by default when you log out of &kde;. These options are not possible on all operating systems, and they require the use of &tdm; as your login manager. -The options available are self explanatory, if you are in doubt, leave the default settings. They are: +The options available are self explanatory, if you are in doubt, leave the default settings. They are: -Login as different user (this is the default) -Turn off computer -Restart computer +Login as different user (this is the default) +Turn off computer +Restart computer -Finally, you can enter a colon (:) separated list of applications that should not be saved in sessions, and therefore will not be started when restoring a session. For example xterm:konsole. +Finally, you can enter a colon (:) separated list of applications that should not be saved in sessions, and therefore will not be started when restoring a session. For example xterm:konsole. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook index 5d05a331969..a1961c33027 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmstyle/index.docbook @@ -2,321 +2,137 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-22 -3.2 +2003-09-22 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -style +KDE +KControl +style -Style +Style -Introduction - -This module is used to configure how the individual widgets are drawn by &kde;. - -A Widget is a commonly-used programmer's term for referring to User Interface elements such as buttons, menus, and scroll bars. You can think of them as the fundamental pieces that are assembled to make your application. - -You can configure how the widgets are drawn with this module, but to change the colour of the widgets, you should refer to the section entitled Colours. - -This panel is divided into three tabs: Style, Effects, Miscellaneous. +Introduction + +This module is used to configure how the individual widgets are drawn by &kde;. + +A Widget is a commonly-used programmer's term for referring to User Interface elements such as buttons, menus, and scroll bars. You can think of them as the fundamental pieces that are assembled to make your application. + +You can configure how the widgets are drawn with this module, but to change the colour of the widgets, you should refer to the section entitled Colours. + +This panel is divided into three tabs: Style, Effects, Miscellaneous. -<guilabel ->Style</guilabel -> tab +<guilabel>Style</guilabel> tab -The top list box, labelled Widget Style contains a list of the pre-defined styles. Each style has a name, and a brief description. +The top list box, labelled Widget Style contains a list of the pre-defined styles. Each style has a name, and a brief description. -To change styles, simply click on the style name, and a preview of the style will be displayed in the preview box below the style list. +To change styles, simply click on the style name, and a preview of the style will be displayed in the preview box below the style list. -The other options available here are: +The other options available here are: - -Show icons on buttons + +Show icons on buttons -If this option is selected, action buttons (like OK and Apply will have a small icon located within them to act as a visual reference. If this option is not selected, then only the text of the button will appear in the button. - - - - -Enable tooltips +If this option is selected, action buttons (like OK and Apply will have a small icon located within them to act as a visual reference. If this option is not selected, then only the text of the button will appear in the button. + + + + +Enable tooltips -This will toggle tooltips off and on. - - - - -Menubar on the top of the screen in the style of MacOS +This will toggle tooltips off and on. + + + + +Menubar on the top of the screen in the style of MacOS -This will turn on a menubar at the top of the screen. This menubar will reflect the menu options of the active application. - - +This will turn on a menubar at the top of the screen. This menubar will reflect the menu options of the active application. + + -<guilabel ->Effects</guilabel -> tab -If you click on the Effects tab, you will see the panel is divided into two sections. -At the top of the first section, is a checkbox labelled Enable GUI effects. If there is no mark in front of this checkbox, then all visual effects of this panel are disabled. To edit any of these effects, simply place a mark in this checkbox. - -Below that checkbox, are 4 combo boxes: +<guilabel>Effects</guilabel> tab +If you click on the Effects tab, you will see the panel is divided into two sections. +At the top of the first section, is a checkbox labelled Enable GUI effects. If there is no mark in front of this checkbox, then all visual effects of this panel are disabled. To edit any of these effects, simply place a mark in this checkbox. + +Below that checkbox, are 4 combo boxes: -Combobox effects -This combobox has two options. If this option is set to Animate then when a combo box is selected, it will appear to scroll down. If Disable is selected, then the combobox list appears instantly. +Combobox effects +This combobox has two options. If this option is set to Animate then when a combo box is selected, it will appear to scroll down. If Disable is selected, then the combobox list appears instantly. -Tool Tip Effect -This combobox has three options. If this option is set to Animate then when a tool tip appears, it will have a short animation. If Fade is selected, the tool tip appears to fade from the background. If Disable is selected, then the tool tip appears instantly. +Tool Tip Effect +This combobox has three options. If this option is set to Animate then when a tool tip appears, it will have a short animation. If Fade is selected, the tool tip appears to fade from the background. If Disable is selected, then the tool tip appears instantly. -Menu Effect -This combobox has four options. If this option is set to Animate then when a menu list appears, it will appear to scroll downward. If Fade is selected, the menu list appears to fade from the background. If Make Transparent is selected, the menu list will have a transparent look to it. The details of that transparency is configured in the next part of the dialogue. If Disable is selected, then the menu list appears instantly. +Menu Effect +This combobox has four options. If this option is set to Animate then when a menu list appears, it will appear to scroll downward. If Fade is selected, the menu list appears to fade from the background. If Make Transparent is selected, the menu list will have a transparent look to it. The details of that transparency is configured in the next part of the dialogue. If Disable is selected, then the menu list appears instantly. -Menu tear-off handles -If this option is set to Disable, then no menus can be separated from the application. If Application Level is selected, then it is left up to each individual application to determine which menus can be torn separated from the application. -Many applications do not have tear off menus. You cannot tell &kde; to force an application to allow tear off menus. This is determined by the authors of the application. +Menu tear-off handles +If this option is set to Disable, then no menus can be separated from the application. If Application Level is selected, then it is left up to each individual application to determine which menus can be torn separated from the application. +Many applications do not have tear off menus. You cannot tell &kde; to force an application to allow tear off menus. This is determined by the authors of the application. -The next checkbox, labelled Menu drop shadow is used to toggle the drop shadow behind all &kde; menus. A drop shadow is a dark, soft line on the bottom and right sides of the menu, which give the menus the appearance that the menu is lifted off the application, and the menu is creating a shadow on the application. +The next checkbox, labelled Menu drop shadow is used to toggle the drop shadow behind all &kde; menus. A drop shadow is a dark, soft line on the bottom and right sides of the menu, which give the menus the appearance that the menu is lifted off the application, and the menu is creating a shadow on the application. -The next section only applies if the combobox labelled Menu Effect is set to Make Transparent. You can use the combo box labelled Menu transparency type to select the method &kde; uses to generate the transparency. You can use the slider to determine the level of transparency in menus. A preview is visible on the right side of this section. +The next section only applies if the combobox labelled Menu Effect is set to Make Transparent. You can use the combo box labelled Menu transparency type to select the method &kde; uses to generate the transparency. You can use the slider to determine the level of transparency in menus. A preview is visible on the right side of this section. -<guilabel ->Miscellaneous</guilabel -> tab - -This small section has six options. - - - - -Highlight buttons under mouse. +<guilabel>Miscellaneous</guilabel> tab + +This small section has six options. + + + + +Highlight buttons under mouse. -If there is a mark in this checkbox, when the mouse pointer is above a toolbar button, that button will be highlighted with a square around the button. This is a good visual indicator of which button will be selected with a mouse click. - - - - -Transparent toolbars when moving +If there is a mark in this checkbox, when the mouse pointer is above a toolbar button, that button will be highlighted with a square around the button. This is a good visual indicator of which button will be selected with a mouse click. + + + + +Transparent toolbars when moving -As the title suggests, if this option is selected, the toolbars will be transparent when you are moving them around on the screen. - - - - -Text position +As the title suggests, if this option is selected, the toolbars will be transparent when you are moving them around on the screen. + + + + +Text position -This combo box lets you determine where on the button the text name of the button will appear as the default. If Icon Only is selected, then there is no text on the tool bar buttons. If Text Only is selected, then the buttons icon is replaced with a text name of the button. If Text Alongside Icons is selected, then the name of the button will be placed to the right of the icon. If Text Under Icons is selected, the default will be to have the text of the button below the icon. -This option only specifies the default location. Each application can override the setting used in this panel. - - +This combo box lets you determine where on the button the text name of the button will appear as the default. If Icon Only is selected, then there is no text on the tool bar buttons. If Text Only is selected, then the buttons icon is replaced with a text name of the button. If Text Alongside Icons is selected, then the name of the button will be placed to the right of the icon. If Text Under Icons is selected, the default will be to have the text of the button below the icon. +This option only specifies the default location. Each application can override the setting used in this panel. + + diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook index 326f9102474..3858ec96524 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kcmtaskbar/index.docbook @@ -2,174 +2,92 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-10-08 -3.2 +2002-10-08 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -taskbar -configure +KDE +KControl +taskbar +configure -Taskbar +Taskbar -<guilabel ->Taskbar</guilabel -> - -The taskbar is a quick way to switch between applications. The taskbar can be located in the panel (default), or outside the panel on the desktop. - -This module has options to control how the taskbar operates: - -Show windows from all desktops, determines if all open windows are included in the taskbar or not. By default, the taskbar only shows the open windows on the current desktop. If this option is enabled, the taskbar will show all open windows on all desktops. - -Using the Show window list button option, you can enable a little button to be shown in the taskbar: this button will open a popup menu offering access to applications on other desktops as well as some useful actions, like Unclutter Windows. - -Sort tasks by virtual desktop changes the sort order of the icons on the taskbar, so that windows on virtual desktop 1 are shown first (to the left, or at the top of the taskbar), followed by windows on virtual desktop 2, and so on. - -You can disable the application icons, and show just the text. You might want to do this to save space on your taskbar, for example. - -You can have the taskbar Show only minimised windows. In this case, when you minimise a window, it will show up on the taskbar, and when you open it again, its taskbar entry will disappear. - -Group similar tasks allows you to save some space on your taskbar, by only showing one icon for each running application, no matter how many windows are shown. You can click on the icon to display a menu of all the windows that are available. This is most useful when you have enabled Show all windows. +<guilabel>Taskbar</guilabel> + +The taskbar is a quick way to switch between applications. The taskbar can be located in the panel (default), or outside the panel on the desktop. + +This module has options to control how the taskbar operates: + +Show windows from all desktops, determines if all open windows are included in the taskbar or not. By default, the taskbar only shows the open windows on the current desktop. If this option is enabled, the taskbar will show all open windows on all desktops. + +Using the Show window list button option, you can enable a little button to be shown in the taskbar: this button will open a popup menu offering access to applications on other desktops as well as some useful actions, like Unclutter Windows. + +Sort tasks by virtual desktop changes the sort order of the icons on the taskbar, so that windows on virtual desktop 1 are shown first (to the left, or at the top of the taskbar), followed by windows on virtual desktop 2, and so on. + +You can disable the application icons, and show just the text. You might want to do this to save space on your taskbar, for example. + +You can have the taskbar Show only minimised windows. In this case, when you minimise a window, it will show up on the taskbar, and when you open it again, its taskbar entry will disappear. + +Group similar tasks allows you to save some space on your taskbar, by only showing one icon for each running application, no matter how many windows are shown. You can click on the icon to display a menu of all the windows that are available. This is most useful when you have enabled Show all windows. -<guilabel ->Actions</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Actions</guilabel> -The next set of options allow you to customise the actions performed with different mouse clicks on taskbar icons. +The next set of options allow you to customise the actions performed with different mouse clicks on taskbar icons. -You can select any action from the list for the &LMB;, the &MMB; and the &RMB;. +You can select any action from the list for the &LMB;, the &MMB; and the &RMB;. -The options available are: +The options available are: -Show Task List +Show Task List -Show the list of tasks grouped under the icon you have clicked on. If there is only one task or window for that icon, it will become the active window. -This is the default action for the &LMB;. +Show the list of tasks grouped under the icon you have clicked on. If there is only one task or window for that icon, it will become the active window. +This is the default action for the &LMB;. -Cycle Through Windows +Cycle Through Windows -If there is more than one task grouped under the icon, switch from one to the next, until you release the button (&ie; when you have reached the window you are looking for). If there is only one task or window for that icon, it will become the active window. +If there is more than one task grouped under the icon, switch from one to the next, until you release the button (&ie; when you have reached the window you are looking for). If there is only one task or window for that icon, it will become the active window. -This is the default action for the &MMB; if window grouping is enabled. +This is the default action for the &MMB; if window grouping is enabled. -Show Operations Menu +Show Operations Menu -Show the operations menu for the application. This allows you to minimise, maximize, &etc;, move windows between desktops, and close windows. You can perform these actions on all windows grouped under that icon, or on any single window, by choosing it from the submenu. -This is the default action for the &RMB;. +Show the operations menu for the application. This allows you to minimise, maximize, &etc;, move windows between desktops, and close windows. You can perform these actions on all windows grouped under that icon, or on any single window, by choosing it from the submenu. +This is the default action for the &RMB;. -Raise Task, Lower Task, Minimise Task +Raise Task, Lower Task, Minimise Task -These three options make sense only if window grouping is disabled. They are fairly self-explanatory. Raise means to make active, bring to the front, and give focus. Lower means, send to the back, and give focus to whichever window is now on top. +These three options make sense only if window grouping is disabled. They are fairly self-explanatory. Raise means to make active, bring to the front, and give focus. Lower means, send to the back, and give focus to whichever window is now on top. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook index 320d43bcdaf..5da87605348 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keyboard/index.docbook @@ -2,108 +2,59 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -keyboard +KDE +KControl +keyboard -Keyboard +Keyboard -This module allows you to choose how your keyboard works. +This module allows you to choose how your keyboard works. -The actual effect of setting these options depends upon the features provided by your keyboard hardware and the X server on which &kde; is running. As an example, you may find that changing the key click volume has no effect because that feature is not available on your system. +The actual effect of setting these options depends upon the features provided by your keyboard hardware and the X server on which &kde; is running. As an example, you may find that changing the key click volume has no effect because that feature is not available on your system. -Advanced +Advanced -Enable keyboard repeat +Enable keyboard repeat -When this option is selected, pressing and holding down a key emits the same character repeatedly until the key is released. Pressing and holding the key will have the same effect as pressing it multiple times in succession. -Almost all users will want to have this option enabled, because it makes navigating through documents with the arrow keys significantly easier. +When this option is selected, pressing and holding down a key emits the same character repeatedly until the key is released. Pressing and holding the key will have the same effect as pressing it multiple times in succession. +Almost all users will want to have this option enabled, because it makes navigating through documents with the arrow keys significantly easier. -NumLock on KDE Startup +NumLock on KDE Startup -You can choose to either always Turn on or Turn off the NumLock when &kde; starts, or you can choose to have &kde; leave NumLock at whatever it was set to before KDE started up. +You can choose to either always Turn on or Turn off the NumLock when &kde; starts, or you can choose to have &kde; leave NumLock at whatever it was set to before KDE started up. -Key click volume: +Key click volume: -If supported, this option allows you to hear audible clicks from your computer's speakers when you press the keys on your keyboard. In essence, this simulates the click of a mechanical type-writer. You can change the loudness of the key click feedback by dragging the slider button or by clicking the up/down arrows on the spin-button. Setting the volume to 0% turns off the key click. -Many computers won't support this function. -Very few people would choose to enable this option, since it generally annoys everyone else in the room. However, if your heart yearns for the pre-soft-key era, this may help you to re-experience the warm sentimentality of days-gone-by. +If supported, this option allows you to hear audible clicks from your computer's speakers when you press the keys on your keyboard. In essence, this simulates the click of a mechanical type-writer. You can change the loudness of the key click feedback by dragging the slider button or by clicking the up/down arrows on the spin-button. Setting the volume to 0% turns off the key click. +Many computers won't support this function. +Very few people would choose to enable this option, since it generally annoys everyone else in the room. However, if your heart yearns for the pre-soft-key era, this may help you to re-experience the warm sentimentality of days-gone-by. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook index ea1405b79b7..46a0ce85692 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/keys/index.docbook @@ -2,244 +2,104 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-13 -3.00.00 +2002-02-13 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -key bindings -bindings -shortcuts +KDE +KControl +key bindings +bindings +shortcuts -Shortcuts - - -Introduction - -While most of the functionality offered by &kde; can be accessed using a simple point and click interface, many people prefer using the keyboard for some tasks. Pressing something like &Ctrl;F is often just faster than moving your hands off the keyboard to the mouse, opening the Edit menu and selecting Find. - -As different people have different preferences about keyboard shortcuts, &kde; offers full customisation of key bindings. A key binding or shortcut is a combination of an action with a key or a combination of keys. +Shortcuts + + +Introduction + +While most of the functionality offered by &kde; can be accessed using a simple point and click interface, many people prefer using the keyboard for some tasks. Pressing something like &Ctrl;F is often just faster than moving your hands off the keyboard to the mouse, opening the Edit menu and selecting Find. + +As different people have different preferences about keyboard shortcuts, &kde; offers full customisation of key bindings. A key binding or shortcut is a combination of an action with a key or a combination of keys. -Use - -In the Shortcuts control module you will see a list of key schemes, a list of key bindings in the currently selected scheme and a frame where you can customise the currently selected key binding. Also, you will see a tab for Global shortcuts and one for Application shortcuts. +Use + +In the Shortcuts control module you will see a list of key schemes, a list of key bindings in the currently selected scheme and a frame where you can customise the currently selected key binding. Also, you will see a tab for Global shortcuts and one for Application shortcuts. -Global Shortcuts and Application Shortcuts - -Global shortcuts and application shortcuts work just the same. Actually, in a certain way application shortcuts are global as well. The only difference is: +Global Shortcuts and Application Shortcuts + +Global shortcuts and application shortcuts work just the same. Actually, in a certain way application shortcuts are global as well. The only difference is: -Global shortcuts are shortcuts for actions that make sense even when no application is opened. These shortcuts usually refer to actions like switching desktops, manipulating windows etc. -Application shortcuts refer to actions that are often available in applications, such as Save, Print, Copy etc. +Global shortcuts are shortcuts for actions that make sense even when no application is opened. These shortcuts usually refer to actions like switching desktops, manipulating windows etc. +Application shortcuts refer to actions that are often available in applications, such as Save, Print, Copy etc. -Please note, that the application shortcuts configured here are only the standard actions often found in applications. Most applications will define their own actions as well, for which you have to customise key bindings using the application's key bindings dialogue. +Please note, that the application shortcuts configured here are only the standard actions often found in applications. Most applications will define their own actions as well, for which you have to customise key bindings using the application's key bindings dialogue. -Configuring Key Bindings +Configuring Key Bindings -Configuring key bindings is pretty easy. In the middle of the key bindings control module you'll find a list of available actions. If there's a key binding configured for that action you'll find it right next to it. Just select the action you want to configure. +Configuring key bindings is pretty easy. In the middle of the key bindings control module you'll find a list of available actions. If there's a key binding configured for that action you'll find it right next to it. Just select the action you want to configure. -After you've selected an action you'll notice that most of the controls below the action list are enabled. There you can configure a combination of keys or maybe no key binding at all for the selected action. +After you've selected an action you'll notice that most of the controls below the action list are enabled. There you can configure a combination of keys or maybe no key binding at all for the selected action. -No key: the selected action will not be associated with any key. - -Default key: the selected action will be associated with &kde;'s default value. This is a good choice for most actions, as &kde; comes with reasonable key bindings we have thought about. - -Custom key: if this option is enabled, you can create a key combination for the selected action. Just select any modifiers (&ie; &Shift;, &Ctrl;, or &Alt;) and then select a key: just click on the key symbol and after that press the key you want to assign to this key combination. +No key: the selected action will not be associated with any key. + +Default key: the selected action will be associated with &kde;'s default value. This is a good choice for most actions, as &kde; comes with reasonable key bindings we have thought about. + +Custom key: if this option is enabled, you can create a key combination for the selected action. Just select any modifiers (&ie; &Shift;, &Ctrl;, or &Alt;) and then select a key: just click on the key symbol and after that press the key you want to assign to this key combination. -As with all control modules, your changes won't take in effect until you click OK or Apply. Click Cancel to discard all changes. +As with all control modules, your changes won't take in effect until you click OK or Apply. Click Cancel to discard all changes. -Configuring Schemes - -A key binding scheme is a set of key bindings that you can access using its name. &kde; comes with one pre-defined key binding scheme called KDE default for 3 modifiers. In addition to that scheme, you'll always see a scheme named Current scheme that stands for the set of key bindings you are using right now (&ie; not the current settings you are playing with, but what you've been using up to now). - -When you are playing with the key bindings for the first time you don't have to be afraid of changing the default bindings: &kde; won't let you overwrite the defaults, so you can always switch back to the factory presets. By choosing Current scheme you can return to the set of key bindings you've been using up to now. However, be careful not to select a scheme when you've made changes to the key bindings you don't want to lose. - -When you are satisfied with a set of key bindings you've created, you may want to save them to a scheme of your own, so that you can still experiment with the bindings and always return to a certain scheme. You can always do this by clicking on the Add button. You will be prompted for a name and then the new scheme will appear in the key schemes listbox. You can remove your own schemes again by selecting a scheme and clicking the Remove button. Click the Save changes button to save any changes you have made to the currently selected scheme. Note that you can not remove or save changes to KDE default or to Current scheme. - -If you want to save your changes while a read-only scheme is selected, you always have to add a new scheme first! If you select one of your own schemes because you want to save the changes to that one, the control module will switch to the key bindings of that scheme, discarding your changes. +Configuring Schemes + +A key binding scheme is a set of key bindings that you can access using its name. &kde; comes with one pre-defined key binding scheme called KDE default for 3 modifiers. In addition to that scheme, you'll always see a scheme named Current scheme that stands for the set of key bindings you are using right now (&ie; not the current settings you are playing with, but what you've been using up to now). + +When you are playing with the key bindings for the first time you don't have to be afraid of changing the default bindings: &kde; won't let you overwrite the defaults, so you can always switch back to the factory presets. By choosing Current scheme you can return to the set of key bindings you've been using up to now. However, be careful not to select a scheme when you've made changes to the key bindings you don't want to lose. + +When you are satisfied with a set of key bindings you've created, you may want to save them to a scheme of your own, so that you can still experiment with the bindings and always return to a certain scheme. You can always do this by clicking on the Add button. You will be prompted for a name and then the new scheme will appear in the key schemes listbox. You can remove your own schemes again by selecting a scheme and clicking the Remove button. Click the Save changes button to save any changes you have made to the currently selected scheme. Note that you can not remove or save changes to KDE default or to Current scheme. + +If you want to save your changes while a read-only scheme is selected, you always have to add a new scheme first! If you select one of your own schemes because you want to save the changes to that one, the control module will switch to the key bindings of that scheme, discarding your changes. -Modifier Keys - -Different keyboards offer different sets of modifier keys. A &Mac; keyboard, for example, does not have a &Ctrl; key, and instead has an Option key. Here you can see what the available modifier keys for the current keyboard are. - -If you enable Macintosh keyboard the list of modifiers will change. - -If you have enabled the &Mac; keyboard, you can further enable MacOS-style modifier usage, to make &kde; behave more like &MacOS;. - -Finally, you can change what a keypress sends to the &X-Server; in the X Modifier Mapping section. A common example is to reconfigure the Caps Lock key, which is rarely used, to be another &Ctrl; key. This is especially nice if you are a touch typist, as Caps Lock is much easier to reach than either of the &Ctrl; keys on a standard keyboard. +Modifier Keys + +Different keyboards offer different sets of modifier keys. A &Mac; keyboard, for example, does not have a &Ctrl; key, and instead has an Option key. Here you can see what the available modifier keys for the current keyboard are. + +If you enable Macintosh keyboard the list of modifiers will change. + +If you have enabled the &Mac; keyboard, you can further enable MacOS-style modifier usage, to make &kde; behave more like &MacOS;. + +Finally, you can change what a keypress sends to the &X-Server; in the X Modifier Mapping section. A common example is to reconfigure the Caps Lock key, which is rarely used, to be another &Ctrl; key. This is especially nice if you are a touch typist, as Caps Lock is much easier to reach than either of the &Ctrl; keys on a standard keyboard. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook index 8e3bfc2a446..b5f4c1a673d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/kthememgr/index.docbook @@ -2,8 +2,7 @@ - + ]>
@@ -11,170 +10,76 @@ - Lauri Watts - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
KDE British Conversion + Lauri Watts + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
KDE British Conversion -2002-02-16 -3.00.00 +2002-02-16 +3.00.00 -KDE -kcontrol -Themes +KDE +kcontrol +Themes -Theme Manager +Theme Manager -With this module you can install, view, and even create, &kde; themes. +With this module you can install, view, and even create, &kde; themes. -This page is divided into two tabs: Installer, Contents. +This page is divided into two tabs: Installer, Contents. -Installer +Installer -Here you can install, preview and create &kde; themes. Themes created this way may not cover all the configurable options that &kde; has to offer. However, they do cover most options and are a great way to get started. +Here you can install, preview and create &kde; themes. Themes created this way may not cover all the configurable options that &kde; has to offer. However, they do cover most options and are a great way to get started. -On the left, you can see a list of themes that &kde; is aware of. Selecting one of the names will change the preview image in the middle of the pane, to give you a small taste of what the theme looks like. Any information the author has provided about the theme, for example, a longer or more descriptive name, is displayed in the bottom of the pane. +On the left, you can see a list of themes that &kde; is aware of. Selecting one of the names will change the preview image in the middle of the pane, to give you a small taste of what the theme looks like. Any information the author has provided about the theme, for example, a longer or more descriptive name, is displayed in the bottom of the pane. -Along with the normal &kcontrol; buttons at the bottom, you have four new ones to the right of the module. Add... allows you to add a new theme to the list on the left. Pressing it will open a normal &kde; file dialogue, where you can browse to the location of themes you have downloaded or created. +Along with the normal &kcontrol; buttons at the bottom, you have four new ones to the right of the module. Add... allows you to add a new theme to the list on the left. Pressing it will open a normal &kde; file dialogue, where you can browse to the location of themes you have downloaded or created. -The Save As... button allows you to save an existing theme with a new name, for example to allow you to easily modify it without damaging the original. It is strongly recommended that you use this if you intend creating themes by hand, you can get very unexpected results if there are errors in a theme file. +The Save As... button allows you to save an existing theme with a new name, for example to allow you to easily modify it without damaging the original. It is strongly recommended that you use this if you intend creating themes by hand, you can get very unexpected results if there are errors in a theme file. -Create will create a theme that contains your current desktop settings. Themes created this way are fairly unsophisticated, but they are a very good start to learning to make your own. +Create will create a theme that contains your current desktop settings. Themes created this way are fairly unsophisticated, but they are a very good start to learning to make your own. -Finally, it's very easy to collect alot of themes that look rather nice on a website, but aren't to your taste once you've tried them. The Remove... will remedy this situation, removing the theme from the list on the left. +Finally, it's very easy to collect alot of themes that look rather nice on a website, but aren't to your taste once you've tried them. The Remove... will remedy this situation, removing the theme from the list on the left. -Contents - -This page works together with the previous one, allowing you to custom fit a theme to your own needs. - -Not all themes contain instructions (or images) for all the configurable parts of &kde;. For example, some contain a colour scheme, a desktop wallpaper, and a style for the panel, but they don't have any icons or Window Decoration instructions. - -Another common situation is to find you have finally got your own icon theme, colour scheme or window decoration arrangement just so, and although you'd like to try out a theme, you don't want to mess up your current installation. - -Using this page, you can see immediately what categories of changes the theme will make, and you can enable or disable its effects on those categories. - -The list under the heading Work on the following parts will show you a checkbox to the left if the theme is going to affect that item, and to the right if the theme actually contains any contents for that category. - -You can use the Clear button to clear all the checkboxes, and the Invert button to check all the checkboxes that are currently empty, and clear those that were checked. - -For example, the Eclipse theme that comes with a base &kde; installation contains contents for all the configurable items, and is by default set up to change them all to its own settings. The MGBreizh theme contains contents for everything except the icons. The Technical theme, which you can find in the tdeartwork package, contains only the icons, so if you were to install MGBreizh, and then Technical, you would find you still had mostly the MGBreizh theme in place, but with new icons. - -Taking this same scenario, what if you really didn't want the MGBreizh theme anymore, and wanted to remove it, and just use the Technical icon theme with a plain desktop? - -You have two choices here. You can check the Uninstall parts of previous theme box, and then any installed theme will be entirely removed before the new one is installed. Or you could just install the Default theme, which really isn't a theme, it's more of a theme cleaner - it removes all other themes, and resets all your desktop theme settings to the &kde; default appearance. +Contents + +This page works together with the previous one, allowing you to custom fit a theme to your own needs. + +Not all themes contain instructions (or images) for all the configurable parts of &kde;. For example, some contain a colour scheme, a desktop wallpaper, and a style for the panel, but they don't have any icons or Window Decoration instructions. + +Another common situation is to find you have finally got your own icon theme, colour scheme or window decoration arrangement just so, and although you'd like to try out a theme, you don't want to mess up your current installation. + +Using this page, you can see immediately what categories of changes the theme will make, and you can enable or disable its effects on those categories. + +The list under the heading Work on the following parts will show you a checkbox to the left if the theme is going to affect that item, and to the right if the theme actually contains any contents for that category. + +You can use the Clear button to clear all the checkboxes, and the Invert button to check all the checkboxes that are currently empty, and clear those that were checked. + +For example, the Eclipse theme that comes with a base &kde; installation contains contents for all the configurable items, and is by default set up to change them all to its own settings. The MGBreizh theme contains contents for everything except the icons. The Technical theme, which you can find in the tdeartwork package, contains only the icons, so if you were to install MGBreizh, and then Technical, you would find you still had mostly the MGBreizh theme in place, but with new icons. + +Taking this same scenario, what if you really didn't want the MGBreizh theme anymore, and wanted to remove it, and just use the Technical icon theme with a plain desktop? + +You have two choices here. You can check the Uninstall parts of previous theme box, and then any installed theme will be entirely removed before the new one is installed. Or you could just install the Default theme, which really isn't a theme, it's more of a theme cleaner - it removes all other themes, and resets all your desktop theme settings to the &kde; default appearance. -Section Author - -This section was written by Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org. - -KDE British Conversion Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Author + +This section was written by Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org. + +KDE British Conversion Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook index 258f0edda9d..a5cf378baee 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/language/index.docbook @@ -2,8 +2,7 @@ - + ]>
@@ -11,323 +10,123 @@ -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-14 3.2 - KDE - KControl - locale - country - language +2003-10-14 3.2 + KDE + KControl + locale + country + language -Country and Language +Country and Language -This module of the &kde; control centre allows you select customisation options that depend on the region of the world that you happen to live in. There are five different pages in this module, each of which is described in detail in the following sections. +This module of the &kde; control centre allows you select customisation options that depend on the region of the world that you happen to live in. There are five different pages in this module, each of which is described in detail in the following sections. -In most cases, you can simply select the country you live in, and the other options will be set in an appropriate manner. +In most cases, you can simply select the country you live in, and the other options will be set in an appropriate manner. -Below the pages of this module, you can see a preview of what the settings look like. In addition to positive and negative numbers, you can see how positive and negative currency values, long and short dates, and times are displayed. When you change any of the settings, the preview shows the effects of the changes before you apply them. +Below the pages of this module, you can see a preview of what the settings look like. In addition to positive and negative numbers, you can see how positive and negative currency values, long and short dates, and times are displayed. When you change any of the settings, the preview shows the effects of the changes before you apply them. -Locale +Locale -On this page, there are two lists, from which you can select the country and languages that you want to use. +On this page, there are two lists, from which you can select the country and languages that you want to use. -When you click on the Country list, a menu pops up showing major groups of countries. You can select one of these regions and see a list of the countries that are available for that region. +When you click on the Country list, a menu pops up showing major groups of countries. You can select one of these regions and see a list of the countries that are available for that region. -If the language for the country you have selected is available on your system, it will be selected automatically. For instance, choosing Germany as the country will select German as the language, if it is available. +If the language for the country you have selected is available on your system, it will be selected automatically. For instance, choosing Germany as the country will select German as the language, if it is available. -Numbers +Numbers -On this page, you can select options for how numbers are displayed. The defaults are selected automatically based on the country which is currently selected. +On this page, you can select options for how numbers are displayed. The defaults are selected automatically based on the country which is currently selected. -In the text box labelled Decimal symbol, you can type the character that you want to use to separate the decimal portion of numbers. You could put anything here you wanted to, but really, . and , are the two characters that make the most sense. +In the text box labelled Decimal symbol, you can type the character that you want to use to separate the decimal portion of numbers. You could put anything here you wanted to, but really, . and , are the two characters that make the most sense. -Similarly, you can choose the character which is used to group units of thousands in numbers. If no character, not even a space, is present, then there will be no separator for thousands. +Similarly, you can choose the character which is used to group units of thousands in numbers. If no character, not even a space, is present, then there will be no separator for thousands. -Finally, you can choose what character should be prefixed to positive and negative numbers respectively. For example, the default for English is not to have any prefix for positive numbers, and a - for negative numbers. +Finally, you can choose what character should be prefixed to positive and negative numbers respectively. For example, the default for English is not to have any prefix for positive numbers, and a - for negative numbers. -Money +Money -Unlike the display of ordinary numbers, conventions for currency values do vary from region to region. However, you will find that the defaults are probably fine. +Unlike the display of ordinary numbers, conventions for currency values do vary from region to region. However, you will find that the defaults are probably fine. -The character or characters representing the currency symbol are based on the country that is currently selected. The decimal symbol and thousands separator work as they do for numbers. The text box labelled Fract digits allows you to specify the number of fractional digits used in displaying currency values. +The character or characters representing the currency symbol are based on the country that is currently selected. The decimal symbol and thousands separator work as they do for numbers. The text box labelled Fract digits allows you to specify the number of fractional digits used in displaying currency values. -For both positive and negative currency values, you can control whether the currency symbol appears before or after the numeric value, and how the sign of the value is distinguished in the display. Note that the symbols used for the sign of currency values are the same as those used for other numeric values. +For both positive and negative currency values, you can control whether the currency symbol appears before or after the numeric value, and how the sign of the value is distinguished in the display. Note that the symbols used for the sign of currency values are the same as those used for other numeric values. -If the checkbox labelled Prefix currency symbol is selected, the currency symbol appears before the numeric value. If this checkbox is cleared, then the currency symbol appears after the numeric value. +If the checkbox labelled Prefix currency symbol is selected, the currency symbol appears before the numeric value. If this checkbox is cleared, then the currency symbol appears after the numeric value. -There are five choices for the way in which the sign of the currency value is handled: +There are five choices for the way in which the sign of the currency value is handled: -The Parens around option displays the numeric value within a pair of parentheses. -The Before quantity money option displays the sign before the numeric value, but after any currency symbol that may be present. -The After quantity money option displays the sign after the numeric value, but before any currency symbol that may be present. -The Before money option displays the sign before the numeric value as well as any currency symbol that may be present. -The After money option displays the sign after the numeric value as well as any currency symbol that may be present. +The Parens around option displays the numeric value within a pair of parentheses. +The Before quantity money option displays the sign before the numeric value, but after any currency symbol that may be present. +The After quantity money option displays the sign after the numeric value, but before any currency symbol that may be present. +The Before money option displays the sign before the numeric value as well as any currency symbol that may be present. +The After money option displays the sign after the numeric value as well as any currency symbol that may be present. -Time and Dates +Time and Dates -If you use a different calendar system than Gregorian, you can choose this from the first dropdown box. +If you use a different calendar system than Gregorian, you can choose this from the first dropdown box. -On the rest of this page, there are text boxes for the time, long date, and short date, in which you can type format strings to control the way in which times and dates are displayed. +On the rest of this page, there are text boxes for the time, long date, and short date, in which you can type format strings to control the way in which times and dates are displayed. -Except for the special codes described below, any other characters in the format strings are displayed literally. The special codes consist of a % sign followed by a character, as shown in the list of codes below: +Except for the special codes described below, any other characters in the format strings are displayed literally. The special codes consist of a % sign followed by a character, as shown in the list of codes below: -Time format codes: +Time format codes: - HH - The hour according to a 24-hour clock, using two digits (00 to 23). - hH - The hour according to a 24-hour clock, using one or two digits (0 to 23). - PH (uppercase eye) - The hour according to a 12-hour clock, using two digits (01 to 12). - pH (lowercase ell) - The hour according to a 12-hour clock, using one or two digits (1 to 12). - MM - The current minute using two digits (00 to 59). - SS - The current second using two digits (00 to 59). - AMPM - Either am or pm depending on the hour. Useful with PH or pH. + HH - The hour according to a 24-hour clock, using two digits (00 to 23). + hH - The hour according to a 24-hour clock, using one or two digits (0 to 23). + PH (uppercase eye) - The hour according to a 12-hour clock, using two digits (01 to 12). + pH (lowercase ell) - The hour according to a 12-hour clock, using one or two digits (1 to 12). + MM - The current minute using two digits (00 to 59). + SS - The current second using two digits (00 to 59). + AMPM - Either am or pm depending on the hour. Useful with PH or pH. -Date format codes: +Date format codes: - YYYY - The year, using 4 digits. - YY - The year, using 2 digits. - MM - The month, using 2 digits (01 to 12). - mM - The month, using 1 or 2 digits (1 to 12). - MONTH - The name of the month. - SHORTMONTH - The abbreviated name of the month. - DD - The day, using 2 digits (01 to 31). - dD - The day, using 1 or 2 digits (1 to 31). - WEEKDAY - The name of the weekday. - SHORTWEEKDAY - The abbreviated name of the weekday. + YYYY - The year, using 4 digits. + YY - The year, using 2 digits. + MM - The month, using 2 digits (01 to 12). + mM - The month, using 1 or 2 digits (1 to 12). + MONTH - The name of the month. + SHORTMONTH - The abbreviated name of the month. + DD - The day, using 2 digits (01 to 31). + dD - The day, using 1 or 2 digits (1 to 31). + WEEKDAY - The name of the weekday. + SHORTWEEKDAY - The abbreviated name of the weekday. -Finally, there's a combobox labelled First day of the week which lets you select which day is the first one of the week in your country. +Finally, there's a combobox labelled First day of the week which lets you select which day is the first one of the week in your country. -Other -You can select the default paper format with the combo box labelled Paper Format. - -Use the drop down box labelled Measure system to select Imperial or Metric systems of measurement. +Other +You can select the default paper format with the combo box labelled Paper Format. + +Use the drop down box labelled Measure system to select Imperial or Metric systems of measurement. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook index f8a56db1571..92117c513ec 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/mouse/index.docbook @@ -2,330 +2,154 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Brad.Hards; &Brad.Hards.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Brad.Hards; &Brad.Hards.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2004-10-09 -3.03.00 +2004-10-09 +3.03.00 -This is the documentation for the &kde; &kcontrol; module that configures mice and other pointing devices. +This is the documentation for the &kde; &kcontrol; module that configures mice and other pointing devices. -KDE -KControl -mouse +KDE +KControl +mouse -Mouse - -This module allows you to configure your pointing device. Your pointing device may be a mouse, a track ball, a touch-pad, or another piece of hardware that performs a similar function. - -This module is divided into several tabs: General, Cursor Theme, Advanced and Mouse Navigation. +Mouse + +This module allows you to configure your pointing device. Your pointing device may be a mouse, a track ball, a touch-pad, or another piece of hardware that performs a similar function. + +This module is divided into several tabs: General, Cursor Theme, Advanced and Mouse Navigation. -<guilabel ->General</guilabel -> +<guilabel>General</guilabel> -Button Order -If you are left-handed, you may prefer to swap the functions of the left and right buttons on your pointing device by choosing the Left handed option. If your pointing device has more than two buttons, only those that function as the left and right buttons are affected. For example, if you have a three-button mouse, the middle button is unaffected. +Button Order +If you are left-handed, you may prefer to swap the functions of the left and right buttons on your pointing device by choosing the Left handed option. If your pointing device has more than two buttons, only those that function as the left and right buttons are affected. For example, if you have a three-button mouse, the middle button is unaffected. -Reverse scroll direction -With this checkbox selected, the scroll wheel (if any) will work in the opposite direction (so that if rolling the top of the scroll wheel towards you previously causes a scroll down, then it will now cause a scroll up). This may be useful to handle a unusual setup of the X server. +Reverse scroll direction +With this checkbox selected, the scroll wheel (if any) will work in the opposite direction (so that if rolling the top of the scroll wheel towards you previously causes a scroll down, then it will now cause a scroll up). This may be useful to handle a unusual setup of the X server. -Double-click to open files and folders (select icons on first click) +Double-click to open files and folders (select icons on first click) -If this option is not checked, icons/files will be opened with a single click of the left mouse-button. This default behaviour is consistent with what you would expect when you click links in most web browsers. If checked however, icons/files will be opened with a double click, while a single click will only select the icon or file. This is the behaviour you may know from other desktops or operating systems. +If this option is not checked, icons/files will be opened with a single click of the left mouse-button. This default behaviour is consistent with what you would expect when you click links in most web browsers. If checked however, icons/files will be opened with a double click, while a single click will only select the icon or file. This is the behaviour you may know from other desktops or operating systems. -Single-click to open files and folders +Single-click to open files and folders -This is the default setting for &kde;. Clicking once on an icon will open it. To select you can drag around the icon(s) or &Ctrl;Right click, or simply click and hold to drag it. You can also enable automatic selection of icons using the Automatically select icons checkbox, discussed below. +This is the default setting for &kde;. Clicking once on an icon will open it. To select you can drag around the icon(s) or &Ctrl;Right click, or simply click and hold to drag it. You can also enable automatic selection of icons using the Automatically select icons checkbox, discussed below. -Change pointer shape over icons +Change pointer shape over icons -When this option is checked, the shape of the mouse pointer changes whenever it is over an icon. +When this option is checked, the shape of the mouse pointer changes whenever it is over an icon. -This option should be checked in most situations. It gives more visual feedback and says, in essence, if you click here, something will happen. +This option should be checked in most situations. It gives more visual feedback and says, in essence, if you click here, something will happen. -Automatically select icons +Automatically select icons -As noted above, if you have Single-click to open files and folders selected, you can select icons by dragging around them, or by using &Ctrl;Right click. If you routinely need to select icons, you may want to enable this checkbox, which will allow icons to be selected automatically by pausing over the icon. The Delay: slider determines how long is required before the automatic selection takes effect. +As noted above, if you have Single-click to open files and folders selected, you can select icons by dragging around them, or by using &Ctrl;Right click. If you routinely need to select icons, you may want to enable this checkbox, which will allow icons to be selected automatically by pausing over the icon. The Delay: slider determines how long is required before the automatic selection takes effect. -Visual feedback on activation +Visual feedback on activation -When this option is checked, &kde; gives you visual feedback whenever you click on something and activate it. +When this option is checked, &kde; gives you visual feedback whenever you click on something and activate it. -<guilabel ->Cursor Theme</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Cursor Theme</guilabel> -This tab allows you to select from a number of cursor themes. A preview of the cursor display is shown above the listbox. +This tab allows you to select from a number of cursor themes. A preview of the cursor display is shown above the listbox. -The features provided by this tab may not be available on some systems. Your system may need to be updated to support cursor themes. +The features provided by this tab may not be available on some systems. Your system may need to be updated to support cursor themes. -If you have additional cursor themes available to you, you can install and remove them using the buttons below the listbox. Note that you cannot remove the default themes. +If you have additional cursor themes available to you, you can install and remove them using the buttons below the listbox. Note that you cannot remove the default themes. -Advanced +Advanced -Pointer acceleration +Pointer acceleration -This option allows you to change the relationship between the distance that the mouse pointer moves on the screen and the relative movement of the physical device itself (which may be a mouse, track-ball, or some other pointing device.) - -A high value for the acceleration multiplier will lead to large movements of the mouse pointer on the screen, even when you only make a small movement with the physical device. - -A multiplier between 1x and 3x will works well for many systems. With a multiplier over 3x the mouse pointer may become difficult to control. +This option allows you to change the relationship between the distance that the mouse pointer moves on the screen and the relative movement of the physical device itself (which may be a mouse, track-ball, or some other pointing device.) + +A high value for the acceleration multiplier will lead to large movements of the mouse pointer on the screen, even when you only make a small movement with the physical device. + +A multiplier between 1x and 3x will works well for many systems. With a multiplier over 3x the mouse pointer may become difficult to control. -Pointer threshold +Pointer threshold -The threshold is the smallest distance that the mouse pointer must move on the screen before acceleration has any effect. If the movement is within the threshold, the mouse pointer moves as if the acceleration were set to 1x. - -Thus, when you make small movements with the physical device (⪚ mouse), you still have fine control of the mouse pointer on the screen, whereas larger movements of the physical device will move the mouse pointer rapidly to different areas on the screen. - -You can set the threshold value by dragging the slider button or by clicking the up/down arrows on the spin-button to the left of the slider. - -In general, the higher you set the Pointer acceleration value, the higher you'll want to set the Pointer threshold value. For example, A Pointer threshold of 4 pixels may be appropriate for a Pointer Acceleration of 2x, but 10 pixels might be better for 3x. +The threshold is the smallest distance that the mouse pointer must move on the screen before acceleration has any effect. If the movement is within the threshold, the mouse pointer moves as if the acceleration were set to 1x. + +Thus, when you make small movements with the physical device (⪚ mouse), you still have fine control of the mouse pointer on the screen, whereas larger movements of the physical device will move the mouse pointer rapidly to different areas on the screen. + +You can set the threshold value by dragging the slider button or by clicking the up/down arrows on the spin-button to the left of the slider. + +In general, the higher you set the Pointer acceleration value, the higher you'll want to set the Pointer threshold value. For example, A Pointer threshold of 4 pixels may be appropriate for a Pointer Acceleration of 2x, but 10 pixels might be better for 3x. -Double click interval +Double click interval -This is the maximum amount of time between clicks for &kde; to register a double click. If you click twice, and the time between those two clicks is less than this number, &kde; recognises that as a double click. If the time between these two clicks is greater than this number, &kde; recognises those as two separate single clicks. +This is the maximum amount of time between clicks for &kde; to register a double click. If you click twice, and the time between those two clicks is less than this number, &kde; recognises that as a double click. If the time between these two clicks is greater than this number, &kde; recognises those as two separate single clicks. -Drag start time and Drag start distance +Drag start time and Drag start distance -If you click with the mouse drag within the time specified in Drag start time, and move a distance equal to or greater than the number (of pixels) specified in Drag start distance &kde; will drag the selected item. +If you click with the mouse drag within the time specified in Drag start time, and move a distance equal to or greater than the number (of pixels) specified in Drag start distance &kde; will drag the selected item. -Mouse wheel scrolls by +Mouse wheel scrolls by -If you have a wheel mouse, use the slider to determine how many lines of text one step of the mouse wheel will scroll. +If you have a wheel mouse, use the slider to determine how many lines of text one step of the mouse wheel will scroll. @@ -334,97 +158,52 @@ -<guilabel ->Mouse Navigation</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Mouse Navigation</guilabel> -This tab allows you to configure the keyboard number pad keys as a mouse-type device. This may be useful when you are working on a device without another pointing device, or where you have no other use for the number pad. +This tab allows you to configure the keyboard number pad keys as a mouse-type device. This may be useful when you are working on a device without another pointing device, or where you have no other use for the number pad. -Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad) +Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad) -To enable keyboard mouse mode, you need to select the checkbox labelled Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad). When you do this, the other settings will become enabled, and you can customise the keyboard pointer behaviour further, if required. -The various keys on the number pad move in the direction you would expect. Note that you can move diagonally as well as up, down, left and right. The 5 key emulates a click to a pointer button, typically &LMB;. You change which button is emulated by using the / key (which makes it &LMB;), * key (which makes it &MMB;) and - (which makes it &RMB;). Using the + emulates a doubleclick to the selected pointer button. You can use the 0 key to emulate holding down the selected pointer button (for easy dragging), and then use the . to emulate releasing the selected pointer button. +To enable keyboard mouse mode, you need to select the checkbox labelled Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad). When you do this, the other settings will become enabled, and you can customise the keyboard pointer behaviour further, if required. +The various keys on the number pad move in the direction you would expect. Note that you can move diagonally as well as up, down, left and right. The 5 key emulates a click to a pointer button, typically &LMB;. You change which button is emulated by using the / key (which makes it &LMB;), * key (which makes it &MMB;) and - (which makes it &RMB;). Using the + emulates a doubleclick to the selected pointer button. You can use the 0 key to emulate holding down the selected pointer button (for easy dragging), and then use the . to emulate releasing the selected pointer button. -Acceleration delay +Acceleration delay -This is the time (in milliseconds) between the initial key press and the first repeated motion event for mouse key acceleration. +This is the time (in milliseconds) between the initial key press and the first repeated motion event for mouse key acceleration. -Repeat interval +Repeat interval -This is the time in milliseconds between repeated motion events for mouse key acceleration. +This is the time in milliseconds between repeated motion events for mouse key acceleration. -Acceleration time +Acceleration time -This is the number of key events before the pointer reaches a maximum speed for mouse key acceleration. +This is the number of key events before the pointer reaches a maximum speed for mouse key acceleration. -Maximum speed +Maximum speed -This is the maximum speed in pixels per key event the pointer can reach for mouse key acceleration. +This is the maximum speed in pixels per key event the pointer can reach for mouse key acceleration. -Acceleration profile +Acceleration profile -This is the slope of the acceleration curve for mouse key acceleration. +This is the slope of the acceleration curve for mouse key acceleration. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook index bb7c2e8fc55..c9517512ca5 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/netpref/index.docbook @@ -2,132 +2,76 @@ - + ]>
-&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; - -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; + +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-10-16 -3.1 +2002-10-16 +3.1 -KDE -tdebase -kcontrol -network -timeouts +KDE +tdebase +kcontrol +network +timeouts -Preferences +Preferences -Here you can set timeout values. You might want to tweak them if your connection is very slow, but the default settings are appropriate for most users. +Here you can set timeout values. You might want to tweak them if your connection is very slow, but the default settings are appropriate for most users. -Here Timeout Values are the length of time an application should wait for an answer from a network operation. +Here Timeout Values are the length of time an application should wait for an answer from a network operation. -You can configure the following timeouts: +You can configure the following timeouts: -Socket Read +Socket Read -Some applications use sockets to communicate. You can think of a socket as a water tap; while it is open, water (or in our case, data) comes out, without any interaction. If something stops this flow of data, the application will wait for more to come. This could be a very long time, but you can configure a maximum time for an application to wait with this option. -This setting will only apply to &kde; applications, of course. +Some applications use sockets to communicate. You can think of a socket as a water tap; while it is open, water (or in our case, data) comes out, without any interaction. If something stops this flow of data, the application will wait for more to come. This could be a very long time, but you can configure a maximum time for an application to wait with this option. +This setting will only apply to &kde; applications, of course. -Proxy Connect +Proxy Connect -Sets how long to wait for a connection to a proxy server, if one is configured. +Sets how long to wait for a connection to a proxy server, if one is configured. -Server Connect +Server Connect -Sets how long to wait for a connection to a remote server. +Sets how long to wait for a connection to a remote server. -Server Response +Server Response -Sets how long to wait for a reply from a remote server. +Sets how long to wait for a reply from a remote server. -You can configure FTP Options here. At present there is just one option, Enable Passive Mode (PASV). - -Passive &FTP; is often required when you are behind a firewall. Many firewalls only permit connections that were initiated from the inside. Passive &FTP; is controlled by the client, which makes it usable through firewalls. +You can configure FTP Options here. At present there is just one option, Enable Passive Mode (PASV). + +Passive &FTP; is often required when you are behind a firewall. Many firewalls only permit connections that were initiated from the inside. Passive &FTP; is controlled by the client, which makes it usable through firewalls.
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook index 9b28919dd8a..193d74f4465 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panel/index.docbook @@ -2,316 +2,132 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-08 -3.2 +2003-10-08 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -panel +KDE +KControl +panel -Panel +Panel -The &kde; panel (often referred to as &kicker;) is the bar that you'll usually find at the bottom of the screen when you start up &kde; for the first time. The panel gives you quick access to applications and makes it easier for you to organise your desktop. Using the &kde; panel you can: +The &kde; panel (often referred to as &kicker;) is the bar that you'll usually find at the bottom of the screen when you start up &kde; for the first time. The panel gives you quick access to applications and makes it easier for you to organise your desktop. Using the &kde; panel you can: -launch applications using the K menu or the application buttons -switch desktops using the panel's pager applet +launch applications using the K menu or the application buttons +switch desktops using the panel's pager applet -switch active windows, and minimise or maximise them +switch active windows, and minimise or maximise them -browse folder using the browser menu functionality -access panel applets that extend the panel's functionality, offering for example mixers, clocks or a system monitor +browse folder using the browser menu functionality +access panel applets that extend the panel's functionality, offering for example mixers, clocks or a system monitor -Arrangement - -In the Arrangement tab you can configure the size and position of the panel. - -In the section labelled Position is a set of 12 small buttons arranged in a square. Each button corresponds to a location for the panel. Click on a button and notice where the panel is located on the preview monitor to the right. - -Generally, the available space in kicker is used more efficiently if the panel is aligned horizontally, &ie; attached to the top or bottom screen border. - -In the section labelled Length, you can use the combo box and slider to adjust the minimum length of the panel. If you place a mark in the checkbox labeled Expand as required to fit contents, the panel will become longer if more space is needed. When less space is required on the panel, the panel will shrink down to the minimum size. If there is no mark in the checkbox, then the panel is fixed to the length specified in this section. - -The final section of this table is labeled Size, and refers to the height of the panel. The panel's size can be Tiny, Small, Medium, Large or Custom. If you choose Custom mode, you can resize &kicker; by specifying a height in the combobox. - -If you have multiple monitors, you can configure the panel for each screen entirely independently. If you are not sure which screen is which, Press the Identify and a number will appear centred on each screen. - -Then simply choose the screen you wish to configure from the drop down box labelled Xinerama screen, or choose All Screens to have identical configurations on each. +Arrangement + +In the Arrangement tab you can configure the size and position of the panel. + +In the section labelled Position is a set of 12 small buttons arranged in a square. Each button corresponds to a location for the panel. Click on a button and notice where the panel is located on the preview monitor to the right. + +Generally, the available space in kicker is used more efficiently if the panel is aligned horizontally, &ie; attached to the top or bottom screen border. + +In the section labelled Length, you can use the combo box and slider to adjust the minimum length of the panel. If you place a mark in the checkbox labeled Expand as required to fit contents, the panel will become longer if more space is needed. When less space is required on the panel, the panel will shrink down to the minimum size. If there is no mark in the checkbox, then the panel is fixed to the length specified in this section. + +The final section of this table is labeled Size, and refers to the height of the panel. The panel's size can be Tiny, Small, Medium, Large or Custom. If you choose Custom mode, you can resize &kicker; by specifying a height in the combobox. + +If you have multiple monitors, you can configure the panel for each screen entirely independently. If you are not sure which screen is which, Press the Identify and a number will appear centred on each screen. + +Then simply choose the screen you wish to configure from the drop down box labelled Xinerama screen, or choose All Screens to have identical configurations on each. -Hiding - -Depending on your screen resolution you may find that the panel takes away too much of your precious screen real estate. To save screen space, the panel offers manual hiding of the panel, an auto hide feature, and the ability to allow other windows to lay on top of the panel. These features are selected in the section entitled Hide Mode. - -The Hide Mode section has three options: +Hiding + +Depending on your screen resolution you may find that the panel takes away too much of your precious screen real estate. To save screen space, the panel offers manual hiding of the panel, an auto hide feature, and the ability to allow other windows to lay on top of the panel. These features are selected in the section entitled Hide Mode. + +The Hide Mode section has three options: -Only hide when panel-hiding button is clicked -When this option is selected, the panel will remain visible at the location you defined unless you click on the button at the far right (for horizontally oriented) or bottom (for vertically oriented) button. This button has an arrow on it pointed to the edge of the screen. - -Once clicked, the panel will disappear. If the button is clicked again, the panel will re-appear at the same location. +Only hide when panel-hiding button is clicked +When this option is selected, the panel will remain visible at the location you defined unless you click on the button at the far right (for horizontally oriented) or bottom (for vertically oriented) button. This button has an arrow on it pointed to the edge of the screen. + +Once clicked, the panel will disappear. If the button is clicked again, the panel will re-appear at the same location. -Hide automatically -If this option is selected, then the panel will automatically disappear after the number of seconds specified in the combo box below the option. To make the panel reappear, simply move the mouse pointer to the edge of the screen where the panel is located, and the panel will reappear immediately. - -If you place a mark in the checkbox labelled Show panel when switching desktops, the panel will automatically reappear when you switch desktops. (The panel will disappear again after the specified number of seconds.) +Hide automatically +If this option is selected, then the panel will automatically disappear after the number of seconds specified in the combo box below the option. To make the panel reappear, simply move the mouse pointer to the edge of the screen where the panel is located, and the panel will reappear immediately. + +If you place a mark in the checkbox labelled Show panel when switching desktops, the panel will automatically reappear when you switch desktops. (The panel will disappear again after the specified number of seconds.) -Allow other windows to cover the panel -As this option's label implies, the panel is always on the desktop when this option is selected. It is now possible, however, for application windows to lay on top of the panel. - -To restore the panel, simply move the mouse cursor to the screen location specified in the drop box labeled Raise when the pointer touches the screen's:. You can change this value by selecting one of the choices provided in the drop down box. - -Once the panel has moved back on top of the application window, it will stay there until the application window becomes active again. +Allow other windows to cover the panel +As this option's label implies, the panel is always on the desktop when this option is selected. It is now possible, however, for application windows to lay on top of the panel. + +To restore the panel, simply move the mouse cursor to the screen location specified in the drop box labeled Raise when the pointer touches the screen's:. You can change this value by selecting one of the choices provided in the drop down box. + +Once the panel has moved back on top of the application window, it will stay there until the application window becomes active again. -The next section down is labelled Panel-Hiding Buttons. It consists of two check boxes: Show left panel-hiding button and Show left panel-hiding button. Use these checkboxes to show and hide the left and right manual panel hiding buttons. - -If there is no mark in the checkbox labeled Animate panel hiding, then whenever the toolbar is hidden, is simply disappears. If there is a mark in the check box, then the panel appears to slide off the edge of the screen. - -You can determine how quickly the panel appears to move by adjusting the slider from Fast to Slow. +The next section down is labelled Panel-Hiding Buttons. It consists of two check boxes: Show left panel-hiding button and Show left panel-hiding button. Use these checkboxes to show and hide the left and right manual panel hiding buttons. + +If there is no mark in the checkbox labeled Animate panel hiding, then whenever the toolbar is hidden, is simply disappears. If there is a mark in the check box, then the panel appears to slide off the edge of the screen. + +You can determine how quickly the panel appears to move by adjusting the slider from Fast to Slow. -Menus +Menus -In the Menus tab you can configure the panel menu's behaviour. This affects the TDE menu you will often use to launch applications, the browser menus you can use to access folders and other menus like the recent documents menu. +In the Menus tab you can configure the panel menu's behaviour. This affects the TDE menu you will often use to launch applications, the browser menus you can use to access folders and other menus like the recent documents menu. -The TDE Menu frame offers you some options to configure the K menu's functionality. This frame consists of 4 items: +The TDE Menu frame offers you some options to configure the K menu's functionality. This frame consists of 4 items: -The Menu item format: radio buttons have three options. This determines how the application name (&ie; &konqueror;, &kword;, &etc;) and the description (&ie; Web Browser, Word Processor, &etc;) are displayed on the TDE menu. - -The Optional Sub Menus checkboxes allow you to determine which special menu items appear in the TDE Menu. -The Bookmarks menu allows you to quickly select from the same bookmarks that are available in &konqueror;. -The Find menu offers access to the &kfind; application to search for local files, and a quick link to a search engine to search for things on the Internet. - -The Preferences menu allows you to launch each &kcontrol; module directly from the TDE menu. -The Print System menu provides several menu entries to help manage the printer(s) attached to your system. -The Quick Browser menu gives you quick links to locations on your hard drive. -The Recent Documents menu lists the most recently edited documents and will automatically launch the application to edit or view this document. -The Terminal Sessions menu provides menu items to launch several different types of terminal programs (command line interfaces). +The Menu item format: radio buttons have three options. This determines how the application name (&ie; &konqueror;, &kword;, &etc;) and the description (&ie; Web Browser, Word Processor, &etc;) are displayed on the TDE menu. + +The Optional Sub Menus checkboxes allow you to determine which special menu items appear in the TDE Menu. +The Bookmarks menu allows you to quickly select from the same bookmarks that are available in &konqueror;. +The Find menu offers access to the &kfind; application to search for local files, and a quick link to a search engine to search for things on the Internet. + +The Preferences menu allows you to launch each &kcontrol; module directly from the TDE menu. +The Print System menu provides several menu entries to help manage the printer(s) attached to your system. +The Quick Browser menu gives you quick links to locations on your hard drive. +The Recent Documents menu lists the most recently edited documents and will automatically launch the application to edit or view this document. +The Terminal Sessions menu provides menu items to launch several different types of terminal programs (command line interfaces). -Show side image will add a small image to the side of the menu. This is purely decorative. - -The Edit TDE Menu button launches the &kde; menu editor. +Show side image will add a small image to the side of the menu. This is purely decorative. + +The Edit TDE Menu button launches the &kde; menu editor. -In the QuickBrowser Menus area you can configure whether the panel's browser menus will show hidden files or not (hidden files on unix systems are those whose filenames begin with a dot) as well as how many files at most will be shown in a browser menu. The latter option may be especially useful if you have a rather small screen resolution, as then the browser menus will quickly fill up your screen when you browse folders containing many files. - -The quick start section in the TDE menu offers quick access to programs you have used often or recently. In the Quick Start Menu Items frame you can choose whether this section will show the most recently or the most frequently used programs. Using the option Maximum number of entries combo box, you can configure how many programs the quick start section will remember. +In the QuickBrowser Menus area you can configure whether the panel's browser menus will show hidden files or not (hidden files on unix systems are those whose filenames begin with a dot) as well as how many files at most will be shown in a browser menu. The latter option may be especially useful if you have a rather small screen resolution, as then the browser menus will quickly fill up your screen when you browse folders containing many files. + +The quick start section in the TDE menu offers quick access to programs you have used often or recently. In the Quick Start Menu Items frame you can choose whether this section will show the most recently or the most frequently used programs. Using the option Maximum number of entries combo box, you can configure how many programs the quick start section will remember. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook index 562d2f264a9..4efbd76d42f 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/panelappearance/index.docbook @@ -2,170 +2,75 @@ - + ]>
-Mike McBride -Jost Schenck -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +Mike McBride +Jost Schenck +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2003-10-06 -3.2 +2003-10-06 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -panel +KDE +KControl +panel -Panel +Panel -Here you can configure the panel's overall appearance. +Here you can configure the panel's overall appearance. -You can also have the icons themselves zoom out when the mouse is over them, with the Enable icon zooming option. You can choose to have tooltips appear when your mouse button is over an icon, by enabling the Show tooltips option. +You can also have the icons themselves zoom out when the mouse is over them, with the Enable icon zooming option. You can choose to have tooltips appear when your mouse button is over an icon, by enabling the Show tooltips option. -Button Backgrounds - -The &kde; panel supports so-called Button Backgrounds. This means that the buttons shown on the panel will be drawn using configurable images. To enable button backgrounds, simply choose the button type from the list, and change the drop down box to the colour image you would like to use. Choose Default to return to an unstyled button. If you choose Custom colour, the colour button next to the drop down list will be enabled. Click on it to select a custom colour to use. +Button Backgrounds + +The &kde; panel supports so-called Button Backgrounds. This means that the buttons shown on the panel will be drawn using configurable images. To enable button backgrounds, simply choose the button type from the list, and change the drop down box to the colour image you would like to use. Choose Default to return to an unstyled button. If you choose Custom colour, the colour button next to the drop down list will be enabled. Click on it to select a custom colour to use. -<guilabel ->Panel Background</guilabel -> - -Enable transparency to turn the entire panel transparent. The desktop background will show through instead of a solid colour panel. - -There will still be small handles beside each applet, to allow you to locate, move, and configure them. These can be turned off in the Advanced Options... - -If you check Enable background image a picture that will be used to draw the panel's background, just as you can use a picture for the desktop background. You can specify an image file in the line edit box below or choose one by clicking on the Browse button. You'll see a preview of the selected picture on the right. - -The image can be tinted on-the-fly by enabling the option Colour to match the desktop colour scheme. You might use a greyscale texture that is tinted in this manner, to create a particular effect. +<guilabel>Panel Background</guilabel> + +Enable transparency to turn the entire panel transparent. The desktop background will show through instead of a solid colour panel. + +There will still be small handles beside each applet, to allow you to locate, move, and configure them. These can be turned off in the Advanced Options... + +If you check Enable background image a picture that will be used to draw the panel's background, just as you can use a picture for the desktop background. You can specify an image file in the line edit box below or choose one by clicking on the Browse button. You'll see a preview of the selected picture on the right. + +The image can be tinted on-the-fly by enabling the option Colour to match the desktop colour scheme. You might use a greyscale texture that is tinted in this manner, to create a particular effect. -<guilabel ->Advanced Options...</guilabel -> - -The Hide button size: option allows you to choose a width in pixels for the hide buttons, if they are visible. - -The panel itself has several default sizes set, which you can switch between by simply dragging the edge of it, or by &RMB; clicking on an empty space in the panel, choosing Size and selecting the desired size from the submenu. If you enable Allow Drag and Drop resizing of panels then by choosing Custom in the panel menu, you can drag the panel edge to any size you like. - -Applet handles are normally visible beside each applet on the panel, so that it is clear where to click to configure them, or to get to the panel menu. You can instead have them Fade out, or hide unless you hover the mouse over them, or you can choose to Hide them completely. - -Finally, if the panel is transparent, you can tint it with a colour of your choice. The slider allows you to choose how opaque the tint is. At the lowest end, there is no tint visible, while at the highest, the panel is not transparent at all. +<guilabel>Advanced Options...</guilabel> + +The Hide button size: option allows you to choose a width in pixels for the hide buttons, if they are visible. + +The panel itself has several default sizes set, which you can switch between by simply dragging the edge of it, or by &RMB; clicking on an empty space in the panel, choosing Size and selecting the desired size from the submenu. If you enable Allow Drag and Drop resizing of panels then by choosing Custom in the panel menu, you can drag the panel edge to any size you like. + +Applet handles are normally visible beside each applet on the panel, so that it is clear where to click to configure them, or to get to the panel menu. You can instead have them Fade out, or hide unless you hover the mouse over them, or you can choose to Hide them completely. + +Finally, if the panel is transparent, you can tint it with a colour of your choice. The slider allows you to choose how opaque the tint is. At the lowest end, there is no tint visible, while at the highest, the panel is not transparent at all. -Section Author -This section written by: Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de -Minor update by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com - -Some new options added by Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org - -Jonathan Riddellkde-en-gb@jriddell.org +Section Author +This section written by: Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de +Minor update by Mike McBride mpmcbride7@yahoo.com + +Some new options added by Lauri Watts lauri@kde.org + +Jonathan Riddellkde-en-gb@jriddell.org diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook index 486f35b7c11..d433efdc682 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/passwords/index.docbook @@ -2,101 +2,53 @@ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-16 -3.2 +2003-10-16 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -password +KDE +KControl +password -Passwords +Passwords -Introduction +Introduction -This module of the &kcontrol; gives you options for configuring the way in which the &tdesu; program treats passwords. &tdesu; will ask you for a password when you try to carry out some privileged actions, such as changing the date/time stored in your system clock, or adding new users on your computer. +This module of the &kcontrol; gives you options for configuring the way in which the &tdesu; program treats passwords. &tdesu; will ask you for a password when you try to carry out some privileged actions, such as changing the date/time stored in your system clock, or adding new users on your computer. -Privileged actions such as those described above can only be carried out by root or a user with administrator permissions on your system. You will need to enter the password for the root account when you want to carry out such actions. +Privileged actions such as those described above can only be carried out by root or a user with administrator permissions on your system. You will need to enter the password for the root account when you want to carry out such actions. -The options in this module do not affect the behaviour of passwords in other programs such as &kmail;. +The options in this module do not affect the behaviour of passwords in other programs such as &kmail;. -Use - -There are two configuration options for passwords. The first is to control the visual feedback that you receive when you type a password. The actual characters in the password are never shown on the screen. You can choose to have each character represented by a * character. If you want to make it harder for someone who might be watching your screen to figure out how many characters there are in the password, you can choose to have each character in the password be represented by three asterisks rather than just one. Still another option is not to have any visual feedback at all, so nothing appears on the screen when you type a password. - -If you work in a reasonably secure environment, you can check the option labelled Remember Passwords, and then choose a time period in minutes using the spinner labelled Timeout. (You can either type a number between 5 and 1200 minutes, or use the arrows on the spinner.) - -If the Remember passwords option has been selected, tdesu will not ask you for a password for the length of time specified, after you have given the password once. Keep in mind, however, that this makes your workstation less secure. - -You should avoid selecting the Remember passwords option if you are working in an insecure area, such as a publicly accessible workstation. Also, note that choosing a shorter timeout may be better if you are in a less secure environment. +Use + +There are two configuration options for passwords. The first is to control the visual feedback that you receive when you type a password. The actual characters in the password are never shown on the screen. You can choose to have each character represented by a * character. If you want to make it harder for someone who might be watching your screen to figure out how many characters there are in the password, you can choose to have each character in the password be represented by three asterisks rather than just one. Still another option is not to have any visual feedback at all, so nothing appears on the screen when you type a password. + +If you work in a reasonably secure environment, you can check the option labelled Remember Passwords, and then choose a time period in minutes using the spinner labelled Timeout. (You can either type a number between 5 and 1200 minutes, or use the arrows on the spinner.) + +If the Remember passwords option has been selected, tdesu will not ask you for a password for the length of time specified, after you have given the password once. Keep in mind, however, that this makes your workstation less secure. + +You should avoid selecting the Remember passwords option if you are working in an insecure area, such as a publicly accessible workstation. Also, note that choosing a shorter timeout may be better if you are in a less secure environment. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook index ac3eb8e7490..89100936044 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/index.docbook @@ -3,8 +3,7 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + ]>
@@ -12,186 +11,93 @@ -&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +JonathanRiddell
kde-en-gb@jriddell.org
Conversion to British English -2002-02-11 -3.00.00 +2002-02-11 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -proxy -proxies +KDE +KControl +proxy +proxies -Proxies +Proxies -Introduction +Introduction -Proxies are programs running on a computer that acts a server on the network you are connected to (whether by modem or other means). These programs receive &HTTP; and &FTP; requests, retrieve the relevant files from the internet, and pass them on to the client computer that made the requests. +Proxies are programs running on a computer that acts a server on the network you are connected to (whether by modem or other means). These programs receive &HTTP; and &FTP; requests, retrieve the relevant files from the internet, and pass them on to the client computer that made the requests. -When you have configured a proxy, &HTTP; and/or &FTP; requests are re-routed through the computer that is acting as a proxy server. However, you can also select specific hosts which should be contacted directly, rather than through the proxy server. If you are on a local network, for example, access to local hosts probably doesn't need to go through a proxy server. +When you have configured a proxy, &HTTP; and/or &FTP; requests are re-routed through the computer that is acting as a proxy server. However, you can also select specific hosts which should be contacted directly, rather than through the proxy server. If you are on a local network, for example, access to local hosts probably doesn't need to go through a proxy server. -You should only need to configure a proxy server if your network administrator requires it (if you are a dial-up user, that would be your internet service provider or ISP). Otherwise, especially if you are feeling a bit confused about this proxy business, but everything seems to be fine with your internet connection, you don't need to change anything. +You should only need to configure a proxy server if your network administrator requires it (if you are a dial-up user, that would be your internet service provider or ISP). Otherwise, especially if you are feeling a bit confused about this proxy business, but everything seems to be fine with your internet connection, you don't need to change anything. -Use +Use -The first option on the page is a checkbox labelled Use proxy. +The first option on the page is a checkbox labelled Use proxy. -Check this box to enable the use of proxy servers for your internet connection. +Check this box to enable the use of proxy servers for your internet connection. -Please note that using proxy servers is optional, but has the benefit or advantage of giving you faster access to data on the internet. +Please note that using proxy servers is optional, but has the benefit or advantage of giving you faster access to data on the internet. -If you are uncertain whether or not you need to use a proxy server to connect to the internet, please consult with your internet service provider's setup guide or your system administrator. +If you are uncertain whether or not you need to use a proxy server to connect to the internet, please consult with your internet service provider's setup guide or your system administrator. -If you have selected to use a proxy, you have several methods to configure the settings for it. +If you have selected to use a proxy, you have several methods to configure the settings for it. -Automatically detected script file +Automatically detected script file -Select this option if you want the proxy setup configuration script file to be automatically detected and downloaded. -This option only differs from the next choice in that it does not require you to supply the location of the configuration script file. Instead, it will be automatically downloaded using Web Access Protocol Discovery (WAPD). - -If you have a problem using this setup, please consult the FAQ section at http://www.konqueror.org for more information. +Select this option if you want the proxy setup configuration script file to be automatically detected and downloaded. +This option only differs from the next choice in that it does not require you to supply the location of the configuration script file. Instead, it will be automatically downloaded using Web Access Protocol Discovery (WAPD). + +If you have a problem using this setup, please consult the FAQ section at http://www.konqueror.org for more information. -Specified script file +Specified script file -Select this option if your proxy support is provided through a script file located at a specific address. You can then enter the address in the location text box, or use the folder icon to browse to it. +Select this option if your proxy support is provided through a script file located at a specific address. You can then enter the address in the location text box, or use the folder icon to browse to it. -Preset environment variables +Preset environment variables -Some systems are setup with $HTTP_PROXY to allow graphical as well as non-graphical applications to share the same proxy configuration information. -If you know this applies to you, select this option and click on the Setup... button to provide the environment variable names used to set the address of the proxy server(s). +Some systems are setup with $HTTP_PROXY to allow graphical as well as non-graphical applications to share the same proxy configuration information. +If you know this applies to you, select this option and click on the Setup... button to provide the environment variable names used to set the address of the proxy server(s). -Manually specified settings +Manually specified settings -Select this option, and click on the Setup... to manually setup the location of the proxy servers to be used. - -If you choose this option, another dialogue will pop up. - -The complete addressing information for the proxy includes both the internet address and a port number. You should enter these into the relevant text boxes. The arrow button copies the information from the HTTP line to the FTP line, in order to help save some typing. - -If there are hosts which you can connect to without going through the proxy server, you can press Add to add the names of these hosts, separated by in the text box labelled No Proxy For:. For example, hosts that are on your local network can probably be contacted directly. - -You can also choose Only use proxy for entries in this list. - -Check this box to reverse the use of the exception list, &ie; the proxy servers will only be used when the requested &URL; matches one of the addresses listed here. - -This features is useful if all you need is a proxy to access a few specific sites, for example, an internal intranet. If you have more complex requirements you might want to use a configuration script. +Select this option, and click on the Setup... to manually setup the location of the proxy servers to be used. + +If you choose this option, another dialogue will pop up. + +The complete addressing information for the proxy includes both the internet address and a port number. You should enter these into the relevant text boxes. The arrow button copies the information from the HTTP line to the FTP line, in order to help save some typing. + +If there are hosts which you can connect to without going through the proxy server, you can press Add to add the names of these hosts, separated by in the text box labelled No Proxy For:. For example, hosts that are on your local network can probably be contacted directly. + +You can also choose Only use proxy for entries in this list. + +Check this box to reverse the use of the exception list, &ie; the proxy servers will only be used when the requested &URL; matches one of the addresses listed here. + +This features is useful if all you need is a proxy to access a few specific sites, for example, an internal intranet. If you have more complex requirements you might want to use a configuration script. @@ -199,24 +105,11 @@ -<guilabel ->Authorisation</guilabel -> - -Here you can choose between two types of authentication, if your proxy requires it. You can have Prompt as needed, the default, in which case &konqueror; will only ask for a username or password if it needs to. - -The other option is Use automatic login. Select this option if you have already set up a login entry for your proxy server in the $TDEDIR/share/config/kionetrc file. +<guilabel>Authorisation</guilabel> + +Here you can choose between two types of authentication, if your proxy requires it. You can have Prompt as needed, the default, in which case &konqueror; will only ask for a username or password if it needs to. + +The other option is Use automatic login. Select this option if you have already set up a login entry for your proxy server in the $TDEDIR/share/config/kionetrc file. &socks-kcontrol; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook index 6463d9b0c07..c8ee36dd9ae 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/proxy/socks.docbook @@ -1,81 +1,29 @@ -&Lauri.Watts; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Lauri.Watts; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -SOCKS +SOCKS -SOCKS is a protocol to execute proxy requests for a client. SOCKS is capable of authentication and encryption of traffic, and is often found in corporate settings, as opposed to home users. For more information about SOCKS, see the NEC website +SOCKS is a protocol to execute proxy requests for a client. SOCKS is capable of authentication and encryption of traffic, and is often found in corporate settings, as opposed to home users. For more information about SOCKS, see the NEC website -With this module you can enable most of the network aware &kde; applications to transparently use SOCKS. +With this module you can enable most of the network aware &kde; applications to transparently use SOCKS. -Setting up of a SOCKS client is outside the scope of this document, and the differences between the commonly used ones are very large. If you already have a working SOCKS implementation, allowing you to use commandline clients (for example, if lynx or ftp are already working) then you can simply check the Enable SOCKS support checkbox. +Setting up of a SOCKS client is outside the scope of this document, and the differences between the commonly used ones are very large. If you already have a working SOCKS implementation, allowing you to use commandline clients (for example, if lynx or ftp are already working) then you can simply check the Enable SOCKS support checkbox. -When this box is checked, several further options become available to you. +When this box is checked, several further options become available to you. -First, you should select which of the various SOCKS clients you have installed on your computer. &kde; will attempt to find this out by itself, if you choose Auto detect. If you know the client you have, you could choose either NEC Socks or Dante. If you have a custom built SOCKS library to use, you can select Use custom library and then enter the path to it in the Path field. +First, you should select which of the various SOCKS clients you have installed on your computer. &kde; will attempt to find this out by itself, if you choose Auto detect. If you know the client you have, you could choose either NEC Socks or Dante. If you have a custom built SOCKS library to use, you can select Use custom library and then enter the path to it in the Path field. -If you want &kde; to auto detect the SOCKS library in use, but you suspect it isn't looking in the right places or you have installed it in a non-standard location, then you can add further paths to be searched in the bottom of this panel. Use the Add and Remove to add or remove paths. +If you want &kde; to auto detect the SOCKS library in use, but you suspect it isn't looking in the right places or you have installed it in a non-standard location, then you can add further paths to be searched in the bottom of this panel. Use the Add and Remove to add or remove paths. -At any time while filling in this module, you can press the Test button, and &kde; will report immediately with a message box to tell you if it could find and initialise SOCKS or not. +At any time while filling in this module, you can press the Test button, and &kde; will report immediately with a message box to tell you if it could find and initialise SOCKS or not. -Changes made here will not affect any applications that are already open. You will need to close and restart them before they are able to connect via SOCKS. +Changes made here will not affect any applications that are already open. You will need to close and restart them before they are able to connect via SOCKS. -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook index 1705b5249c0..e841382b86b 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/screensaver/index.docbook @@ -2,284 +2,129 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-09-19 -3.01.00 +2002-09-19 +3.01.00 -KDE -KControl -screensaver -screen saver +KDE +KControl +screensaver +screen saver -Screen Saver +Screen Saver -Using this module, you can choose your screen saver, determine how much time must pass before the screen saver is activated, and add or remove password protection to your screen saver. +Using this module, you can choose your screen saver, determine how much time must pass before the screen saver is activated, and add or remove password protection to your screen saver. -Choosing the screen saver, and configuring its options - -In the Settings box is a check box labeled Start screen saver automatically. This box must have a mark in it, or &kde; will not launch any screen saver and it will not allow you to adjust the settings of your screen saver. - -Along the left side is a list of all available screen savers. You can select a screen saver by simply clicking on its name. Once you have selected a screen saver, you will see a small preview on the monitor on the right. - -The preview monitor will often show the screen saver larger than it is when the screen saver is activated. This is done on purpose, since many of the details of the screen savers would be unintelligible if actually scaled down to such a small size. - -Each screen saver has a different set of setup options. By clicking on Setup..., a dialogue box will appear with all available options. As you adjust the options, the preview box in the dialog box will show you what effect you will achieve with the current settings. - -When you are done setting up your screen saver, click OK. Clicking Cancel will erase any changes you made in this dialogue box, and return you to the screen saver module. - -Clicking the About button will give you the Copyright and Author information if you are interested. - -When you think you have all the options set the way you want, simply click on Test to immediately start the screen saver exactly as it will appear. +Choosing the screen saver, and configuring its options + +In the Settings box is a check box labeled Start screen saver automatically. This box must have a mark in it, or &kde; will not launch any screen saver and it will not allow you to adjust the settings of your screen saver. + +Along the left side is a list of all available screen savers. You can select a screen saver by simply clicking on its name. Once you have selected a screen saver, you will see a small preview on the monitor on the right. + +The preview monitor will often show the screen saver larger than it is when the screen saver is activated. This is done on purpose, since many of the details of the screen savers would be unintelligible if actually scaled down to such a small size. + +Each screen saver has a different set of setup options. By clicking on Setup..., a dialogue box will appear with all available options. As you adjust the options, the preview box in the dialog box will show you what effect you will achieve with the current settings. + +When you are done setting up your screen saver, click OK. Clicking Cancel will erase any changes you made in this dialogue box, and return you to the screen saver module. + +Clicking the About button will give you the Copyright and Author information if you are interested. + +When you think you have all the options set the way you want, simply click on Test to immediately start the screen saver exactly as it will appear. -Setting the time, priority and passwords for screen savers. - -Below the Preview Monitor, is the Start screen saver automatically check box, and a spin box which determines the period of inactivity before the screen saver should be started. You can enter any number from 1-120 minutes in this box. - -Enable the check box Make the screen saver aware of power management if you do not want the screensaver to start while you watch TV or movies on your monitor. - -Below that is a check box labelled Require password to stop screen saver. If it is checked, when you click a key or click a mouse button to end the screen saver and return to your work, you must enter a password. The password used is the same password you used to login to your machine. If there is no mark in the check box, no password is required to return to your desktop. - -Finally, there is a slider labelled Priority. If your screen saver appears jumpy, you should increase the priority closer to the High end. This will tell your computer to devote more time to the screen saver, and less time to other tasks. +Setting the time, priority and passwords for screen savers. + +Below the Preview Monitor, is the Start screen saver automatically check box, and a spin box which determines the period of inactivity before the screen saver should be started. You can enter any number from 1-120 minutes in this box. + +Enable the check box Make the screen saver aware of power management if you do not want the screensaver to start while you watch TV or movies on your monitor. + +Below that is a check box labelled Require password to stop screen saver. If it is checked, when you click a key or click a mouse button to end the screen saver and return to your work, you must enter a password. The password used is the same password you used to login to your machine. If there is no mark in the check box, no password is required to return to your desktop. + +Finally, there is a slider labelled Priority. If your screen saver appears jumpy, you should increase the priority closer to the High end. This will tell your computer to devote more time to the screen saver, and less time to other tasks. -Using a non-&kde; screen saver +Using a non-&kde; screen saver -&kde; does not prevent another screen saver from working. To use a different screen saver, such as xscreensaver, simply disable the &kde; Screen Saver, and set up your other screen saver program normally. +&kde; does not prevent another screen saver from working. To use a different screen saver, such as xscreensaver, simply disable the &kde; Screen Saver, and set up your other screen saver program normally. -Removing and restoring a screen saver from your system - -If you want to remove a screen saver from the list in this Control Centre Module, you will need to rename a file on your system. - -Working as a root user is a potentially dangerous situation. While unlikely, it is entirely possible to do permanent damage to your system while working as root. - -Be very careful following the next set of directions - -To delete a screen saver, type the following commands: - -bash$ cd +Removing and restoring a screen saver from your system + +If you want to remove a screen saver from the list in this Control Centre Module, you will need to rename a file on your system. + +Working as a root user is a potentially dangerous situation. While unlikely, it is entirely possible to do permanent damage to your system while working as root. + +Be very careful following the next set of directions + +To delete a screen saver, type the following commands: + +bash$ cd $TDEDIR/share/applnk/System/ScreenSavers -bash$ ls - - -This will give you a list of files. You will notice similarities between some of the file names and that of the screen saver you want to remove. Simply rename the file of similarly named desktop file to a name which does not end in desktop. - -Example: -bash$ cd +bash$ ls + + +This will give you a list of files. You will notice similarities between some of the file names and that of the screen saver you want to remove. Simply rename the file of similarly named desktop file to a name which does not end in desktop. + +Example: +bash$ cd $TDEDIR/share/applnk/System/ScreenSavers -bash$ mv KSpace.desktop KSpace.backup - - -Will remove Space (GL) from the list - -You must close the &kcontrolcenter; entirely and restart it before the changes will be seen. - -To restore the disabled screen saver, simply rename the file back to its original name: - -bash$ cd +bash$ mv KSpace.desktop KSpace.backup + + +Will remove Space (GL) from the list + +You must close the &kcontrolcenter; entirely and restart it before the changes will be seen. + +To restore the disabled screen saver, simply rename the file back to its original name: + +bash$ cd $TDEDIR/share/applnk/System/ScreenSavers -bash$ mv KSpace.backup KSpace.desktop - +bash$ mv KSpace.backup KSpace.desktop + -Restart the &kcontrolcenter;, and the screen saver is back in the list. +Restart the &kcontrolcenter;, and the screen saver is back in the list. -Advanced Settings: Grace period - -There is a five second grace period after the screen saver begins before a password is required even if Require password is checked. -Locking the desktop manually, by clicking the lock icon in the &kde; panel, causes the password protection to engage immediately with no grace period. -To alter the grace period setting, you need to manually edit the configuration file. To do so: -$ cd ~/.trinity/share/config -Now, using a text editor (the example uses &kate;, the &kde; text editor), load the kdesktoprc. -$ kate kdesktoprc -Search through the file for the section labelled [Screensaver]. -Look through all lines in the section for an entry entitled LockGrace. -If the entry exists, you can edit the value of the entry. -[Screensaver] +Advanced Settings: Grace period + +There is a five second grace period after the screen saver begins before a password is required even if Require password is checked. +Locking the desktop manually, by clicking the lock icon in the &kde; panel, causes the password protection to engage immediately with no grace period. +To alter the grace period setting, you need to manually edit the configuration file. To do so: +$ cd ~/.trinity/share/config +Now, using a text editor (the example uses &kate;, the &kde; text editor), load the kdesktoprc. +$ kate kdesktoprc +Search through the file for the section labelled [Screensaver]. +Look through all lines in the section for an entry entitled LockGrace. +If the entry exists, you can edit the value of the entry. +[Screensaver] LockGrace=3000 -The value of the entity represents the duration of the grace period in milliseconds. An entry of 3000, would change the grace period to 3 seconds. You can set the value of the entry to any number between zero (no grace period) and 300000 (5 minutes). -If the entry does not exist, simply add the entry to the end of the section. +The value of the entity represents the duration of the grace period in milliseconds. An entry of 3000, would change the grace period to 3 seconds. You can set the value of the entry to any number between zero (no grace period) and 300000 (5 minutes). +If the entry does not exist, simply add the entry to the end of the section. -Any changes to the configuration entry take effect immediately. +Any changes to the configuration entry take effect immediately. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook index 0c6c183792a..7b2f23b2f22 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/smb/index.docbook @@ -2,80 +2,36 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2002-02-12 -3.00.00 +2002-02-12 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -Windows shares +KDE +KControl +Windows shares -Windows Shares +Windows Shares -Introduction - -In many small local area networks, the SMB protocol is used to offer network services. Names like &Windows; Network or &Windows; for Workgroups Network or LanManager are often used as well. Using SMB you can access so-called shares (&ie; folders made available by the server) as well as printers. - -&kde; comes with built-in support for the SMB protocol. As &kde; is network-transparent that means you can access SMB shares from everywhere you can access your local files, for example in the &konqueror; file manager and in the file dialogue. To make use of this you should provide &kde; with some information on your SMB network. But do not worry, this is normally pretty simple as, for example, all the Windows clients in your network need and have the same information. +Introduction + +In many small local area networks, the SMB protocol is used to offer network services. Names like &Windows; Network or &Windows; for Workgroups Network or LanManager are often used as well. Using SMB you can access so-called shares (&ie; folders made available by the server) as well as printers. + +&kde; comes with built-in support for the SMB protocol. As &kde; is network-transparent that means you can access SMB shares from everywhere you can access your local files, for example in the &konqueror; file manager and in the file dialogue. To make use of this you should provide &kde; with some information on your SMB network. But do not worry, this is normally pretty simple as, for example, all the Windows clients in your network need and have the same information. @@ -86,18 +42,7 @@ very cool thing (TM) btw. If you want to write some documentation for this one too, have a look at tdenetwork/lanbrowsing/lisa/README and contact me if you have questions. --> -For the SMB protocol to work, it is required to have Samba correctly installed. If you have an NT domain controller, you will need at least Samba version 2.0 or higher. If you want to access &Windows; 2000 shares, you will need Samba version 2.0.7 or higher. Older versions may work too, but have not been tested. +For the SMB protocol to work, it is required to have Samba correctly installed. If you have an NT domain controller, you will need at least Samba version 2.0 or higher. If you want to access &Windows; 2000 shares, you will need Samba version 2.0.7 or higher. Older versions may work too, but have not been tested. @@ -105,48 +50,15 @@ or file dialog manual --> -Use - -Although there are a lot of insecure SMB networks out there which allow access to anyone, in principle you have to authenticate yourself to access the services of an SMB server. By default, &kde; will use the data entered in the Default user name and Default password fields to authenticate itself on SMB hosts. If you leave the field Default user name empty, &kde; will try to access SMB hosts without a username. If you leave the default password empty, it will try without a password. If &kde; is unsuccessful accessing the host using these settings, you will be asked for a username and a password. - -While it makes things more comfortable if &kde; stores your SMB password, this may be a security problem. If you are using SMB in a security conscious environment, you should not store your password here but rather enter it anew every time you need to access an SMB host. - -In the Workgroup field, you can enter your workgroup name. If you don't know it, ask your system administrator or have a look at other already configured machines in your network. However, in most cases providing the workgroup name is not required, so you probably can also leave this empty. - -If the option Show hidden shares is checked, shares ending with a $ will be shown. +Use + +Although there are a lot of insecure SMB networks out there which allow access to anyone, in principle you have to authenticate yourself to access the services of an SMB server. By default, &kde; will use the data entered in the Default user name and Default password fields to authenticate itself on SMB hosts. If you leave the field Default user name empty, &kde; will try to access SMB hosts without a username. If you leave the default password empty, it will try without a password. If &kde; is unsuccessful accessing the host using these settings, you will be asked for a username and a password. + +While it makes things more comfortable if &kde; stores your SMB password, this may be a security problem. If you are using SMB in a security conscious environment, you should not store your password here but rather enter it anew every time you need to access an SMB host. + +In the Workgroup field, you can enter your workgroup name. If you don't know it, ask your system administrator or have a look at other already configured machines in your network. However, in most cases providing the workgroup name is not required, so you probably can also leave this empty. + +If the option Show hidden shares is checked, shares ending with a $ will be shown. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook index 4578d3b55c8..67ff42190f2 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/spellchecking/index.docbook @@ -2,133 +2,66 @@ - + ]>
-&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; +&Lauri.Watts; &Lauri.Watts.mail; -MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English +MalcolmHunter
malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk
Conversion to British English -2003-10-13 -3.2 +2003-10-13 +3.2 -KDE -Spelling -dictionary +KDE +Spelling +dictionary -Spell Checker +Spell Checker -The configuration options available here are used by all &kde; applications that use &tdespell;, which is a front end to ispell or aspell. +The configuration options available here are used by all &kde; applications that use &tdespell;, which is a front end to ispell or aspell. -Create root/affix combinations not in dictionary +Create root/affix combinations not in dictionary -Selecting this option allows the spell checker to register as correct combinations of root words with suffixes or prefixes even if the particular combination is not listed in its dictionary database of words. +Selecting this option allows the spell checker to register as correct combinations of root words with suffixes or prefixes even if the particular combination is not listed in its dictionary database of words. -Consider run-together words as spelling errors -If this is selected, then words that appear in the dictionary separately, but have been run together, are considered to be spelling errors. For example, even though alarm and clock might be in your dictionary, if alarmclock is not, it will be flagged as a spelling error. +Consider run-together words as spelling errors +If this is selected, then words that appear in the dictionary separately, but have been run together, are considered to be spelling errors. For example, even though alarm and clock might be in your dictionary, if alarmclock is not, it will be flagged as a spelling error. -Dictionary: +Dictionary: -Choose from the available dictionaries, which one to use for &tdespell;. +Choose from the available dictionaries, which one to use for &tdespell;. -Encoding: +Encoding: -You should select the one that matches the character set you are using. In some cases, dictionaries will support more than one encoding. A dictionary might, for example, accept accented characters when Latin1 is selected, but accept email-style character combinations (like 'a for an accented a) when 7-Bit-ASCII is selected. Please see your dictionary's distribution for more information. +You should select the one that matches the character set you are using. In some cases, dictionaries will support more than one encoding. A dictionary might, for example, accept accented characters when Latin1 is selected, but accept email-style character combinations (like 'a for an accented a) when 7-Bit-ASCII is selected. Please see your dictionary's distribution for more information. -Client: +Client: -You can choose which of the installed client applications on your system to use. For example, you can choose ispell. +You can choose which of the installed client applications on your system to use. For example, you can choose ispell. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook index 4c7deb25248..62b7ea24e4c 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/index.docbook @@ -3,339 +3,146 @@ "dtd/kdex.dtd" [ - + ]>
-&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -konqueror -browsing +KDE +KControl +konqueror +browsing -Browsing With &konqueror; +Browsing With &konqueror; -The &konqueror; Browser module of &kcontrol; allows you to select various options for the appearance and behaviour of &konqueror;, the integrated web browser of &kde;. +The &konqueror; Browser module of &kcontrol; allows you to select various options for the appearance and behaviour of &konqueror;, the integrated web browser of &kde;. -Behaviour - -The first option you can enable on this page is Enable completion of forms. If you check this box, &konqueror; will try to remember what you answer to form questions, and will try to fill in forms for you with the answers you previously used. - -You can configure the number of form items &konqueror; remembers with the slider below labelled Maximum completions - -Of course, anything &konqueror; fills in a form with, you can still edit before submitting the form! - -The next option is Change cursor over links. If this option is selected, the shape of the cursor will change (usually to a hand) whenever it moves over a hyperlink. This makes it easy to identify links, especially when they are in the form of images. - -&konqueror; defaults to a single window per page, but has the capability to open multiple tabs inside a single window. &konqueror; also, by default, has a &MMB; shortcut to open any link in a new window. If you enable Open links in new tab instead of in new window you can &MMB; click on a link to have it open in a new tab. - -If you are using tabbed browsing, you can choose if a newly opened tab becomes the active (front) tab, or goes to the back. On a slow internet connection, or while browsing a page that has a list of headlines or other links in a list, you may like to have the new tabs load in the background while you continue reading. In this case, leave this setting disabled. If you prefer to go straight to the new page, leaving the old one in the background to return to later, enable it. - -If you close a window in &konqueror; that has multiple tabs open, &konqueror; will ask you if you're sure that you meant to close it. You can toggle on and off this behaviour with the Confirm when closing windows with multiple tabs checkbox. - -As a convenience feature, if you enable Right click goes back in history, then clicking an empty area (&ie; not a link) in the &konqueror; window will act as if you pressed the Back button on the toolbar. - -The checkbox labelled Automatically load images, allows you to control whether images on web pages are loaded by default. Unless you have a very slow connection, you will probably want to leave this option selected, as there are many web pages that are difficult to use without images. If you don't select the option to automatically load images, you can still view the text on the page, and then load the images if you need them. - -Enabling Allow automatic delayed reloading/redirecting allows websites to send you to another page without your interaction. In many cases, this is a convenience. For example, the website has moved to a new URL. Many webmasters in this situation will put up a page on the old site, telling you that it has moved and you may like to change your bookmark, and then automatically move you along to the new website. However, such features can be confusing, or annoying, when misused, and so you may wish to disable it. - -The next setting is Underline links:. You can choose to underline links Always. If this option is selected, any text on web pages that acts as a link will be shown in an underlined font. While many web pages do use colour to distinguish text that acts as a link, underlining makes it very easy to spot links. - -If you don't like underlined links, you can choose Never, so that no links are underlined. Or you can choose a middle ground, Hover, so that links are underlined when the mouse cursor is resting over them, and not underlined the rest of the time. - -Many web pages use animated gif images, and these can be very annoying, and in some cases, quite a drain on your system resources. The Animations option lets you choose when animations are enabled. The default is enabled, but you can set this to disabled, or to run the animation only once, even if the file itself contains instructions that the animation should run more times, or continuously. +Behaviour + +The first option you can enable on this page is Enable completion of forms. If you check this box, &konqueror; will try to remember what you answer to form questions, and will try to fill in forms for you with the answers you previously used. + +You can configure the number of form items &konqueror; remembers with the slider below labelled Maximum completions + +Of course, anything &konqueror; fills in a form with, you can still edit before submitting the form! + +The next option is Change cursor over links. If this option is selected, the shape of the cursor will change (usually to a hand) whenever it moves over a hyperlink. This makes it easy to identify links, especially when they are in the form of images. + +&konqueror; defaults to a single window per page, but has the capability to open multiple tabs inside a single window. &konqueror; also, by default, has a &MMB; shortcut to open any link in a new window. If you enable Open links in new tab instead of in new window you can &MMB; click on a link to have it open in a new tab. + +If you are using tabbed browsing, you can choose if a newly opened tab becomes the active (front) tab, or goes to the back. On a slow internet connection, or while browsing a page that has a list of headlines or other links in a list, you may like to have the new tabs load in the background while you continue reading. In this case, leave this setting disabled. If you prefer to go straight to the new page, leaving the old one in the background to return to later, enable it. + +If you close a window in &konqueror; that has multiple tabs open, &konqueror; will ask you if you're sure that you meant to close it. You can toggle on and off this behaviour with the Confirm when closing windows with multiple tabs checkbox. + +As a convenience feature, if you enable Right click goes back in history, then clicking an empty area (&ie; not a link) in the &konqueror; window will act as if you pressed the Back button on the toolbar. + +The checkbox labelled Automatically load images, allows you to control whether images on web pages are loaded by default. Unless you have a very slow connection, you will probably want to leave this option selected, as there are many web pages that are difficult to use without images. If you don't select the option to automatically load images, you can still view the text on the page, and then load the images if you need them. + +Enabling Allow automatic delayed reloading/redirecting allows websites to send you to another page without your interaction. In many cases, this is a convenience. For example, the website has moved to a new URL. Many webmasters in this situation will put up a page on the old site, telling you that it has moved and you may like to change your bookmark, and then automatically move you along to the new website. However, such features can be confusing, or annoying, when misused, and so you may wish to disable it. + +The next setting is Underline links:. You can choose to underline links Always. If this option is selected, any text on web pages that acts as a link will be shown in an underlined font. While many web pages do use colour to distinguish text that acts as a link, underlining makes it very easy to spot links. + +If you don't like underlined links, you can choose Never, so that no links are underlined. Or you can choose a middle ground, Hover, so that links are underlined when the mouse cursor is resting over them, and not underlined the rest of the time. + +Many web pages use animated gif images, and these can be very annoying, and in some cases, quite a drain on your system resources. The Animations option lets you choose when animations are enabled. The default is enabled, but you can set this to disabled, or to run the animation only once, even if the file itself contains instructions that the animation should run more times, or continuously. -Fonts - -Under this tab, you can select various options related to the use of fonts. Although the shapes and sizes of fonts are often part of the design of a web page, you can select some default settings for &konqueror; to use. - -The first thing you can set here is the font size. There are two settings which work together to allow you a comfortable browsing experience. - -Firstly, you can set a Minimum Font Size. This means, even if the font size is set specifically in the page you are viewing, &konqueror; will ignore that instruction and never show smaller fonts than you set here. - -Next you can set a Medium Font Size. This is not only the default size of text, used when the page doesn't specify sizes, but it is also used as the base size that relative font sizes are calculated against. That is, the HTML instruction smaller, it means smaller than the size you set for this option. - -For either option, you can select the exact font size in points by using the up/down spin control (or just typing) next to the option label. - -These options are independent of each other. Pages that do not set a font size, or ask for the default, will display with the size you set from Medium Font Size, while any pages that ask for a size smaller than your Minimum Font Size setting will instead show that size. The one does not affect the other. - -The remaining options are for the fonts to be associated with different types of markup used in HTML pages. Note that many web pages may override these settings. If you click anywhere on a control which shows a font name, a list of font names appears, and you can select a different font if you like. (If there are a lot of fonts, a vertical scrollbar appears in the list to allow you to scroll through all of the fonts.) +Fonts + +Under this tab, you can select various options related to the use of fonts. Although the shapes and sizes of fonts are often part of the design of a web page, you can select some default settings for &konqueror; to use. + +The first thing you can set here is the font size. There are two settings which work together to allow you a comfortable browsing experience. + +Firstly, you can set a Minimum Font Size. This means, even if the font size is set specifically in the page you are viewing, &konqueror; will ignore that instruction and never show smaller fonts than you set here. + +Next you can set a Medium Font Size. This is not only the default size of text, used when the page doesn't specify sizes, but it is also used as the base size that relative font sizes are calculated against. That is, the HTML instruction smaller, it means smaller than the size you set for this option. + +For either option, you can select the exact font size in points by using the up/down spin control (or just typing) next to the option label. + +These options are independent of each other. Pages that do not set a font size, or ask for the default, will display with the size you set from Medium Font Size, while any pages that ask for a size smaller than your Minimum Font Size setting will instead show that size. The one does not affect the other. + +The remaining options are for the fonts to be associated with different types of markup used in HTML pages. Note that many web pages may override these settings. If you click anywhere on a control which shows a font name, a list of font names appears, and you can select a different font if you like. (If there are a lot of fonts, a vertical scrollbar appears in the list to allow you to scroll through all of the fonts.) -Below this, you can set a Font size adjustment for this encoding. Sometimes the fonts you want to use for a particular encoding or language are much larger or smaller than average, so you can use this setting to bring them into line. +Below this, you can set a Font size adjustment for this encoding. Sometimes the fonts you want to use for a particular encoding or language are much larger or smaller than average, so you can use this setting to bring them into line. -You can set a default encoding that &konqueror; should assume pages are when rendering them. The default setting is Use language encoding, but you can change it to any encoding available in the list. +You can set a default encoding that &konqueror; should assume pages are when rendering them. The default setting is Use language encoding, but you can change it to any encoding available in the list. -&Java; and JavaScript - -&Java; allows applications to be downloaded and run by a web browser, provided you have the necessary software installed on your machine. Many web sites make use of &Java; (for example, online banking services or interactive gaming sites). You should be aware that running programs from unknown sources could pose a threat to the security of your computer, even if the potential extent of the damage is not great. - -The checkboxes under Global Settings allows you to turn &Java; support on for all web sites by default. You can also select to turn &Java; on or off for specific hosts. To add a policy for a specific host, click the Add... button to bring up a dialogue in which you can type the host name and then choose to accept or reject &Java; code from that particular host, which will add the domain to the list on the left of the page. - -You can select a host in the list, and click the Change... button to choose a different policy for that host. Clicking the Delete button removes the policy for the selected host; after deletion, the global settings will then apply to that host. You can import policies from a file by clicking the Import... button. To save the current list to a compressed archive file, click the Export... button. - -Finally, the group of controls labelled Java Runtime Settings allows you to set some options for the way in which &Java; should run. These options are useful for diagnosing problems, or if you are a &Java; developer, and should not normally need adjusting. - -If you select the Show Java Console option, &konqueror; will open a console window from which &Java; applications can read and write text. While most &Java; applications will not require such a console, it could be helpful in diagnosing problems with &Java; applications. - -Use TDEIO will cause the JVMto use &kde;'s own TDEIO transports for network connections. - -Use security manager is normally enabled by default. This setting will cause the JVM to run with a Security Manager in place. This will keep applets from being able to read and write to your file system, creating arbitrary sockets, and other actions which could be used to compromise your system. Disable this option at your own risk. You can modify your $HOME/.java.policy file with the &Java; policytool utility to give code downloaded from certain sites more permissions. - -The Shutdown Applet Server when inactive checkbox allows you to save resources by closing the &Java; Applet Server when it is not in use, rather than leaving it running in the background. Leaving this disabled may make &Java; applets start up faster, but it will use system resources when you are not using a &Java; applet. If you enable this, you can set a timeout. - -You can either opt to have &konqueror; automatically detect the &Java; installation on your system, or specify the path to the installation yourself by selecting Use user-specified Java. You may want to choose the latter method, for instance, if you have multiple &Java; installations on your system, and want to specify which one to use. If the &Java; Virtual Machine you are using requires any special startup options, you can type them in the text box labelled Additional Java Arguments. +&Java; and JavaScript + +&Java; allows applications to be downloaded and run by a web browser, provided you have the necessary software installed on your machine. Many web sites make use of &Java; (for example, online banking services or interactive gaming sites). You should be aware that running programs from unknown sources could pose a threat to the security of your computer, even if the potential extent of the damage is not great. + +The checkboxes under Global Settings allows you to turn &Java; support on for all web sites by default. You can also select to turn &Java; on or off for specific hosts. To add a policy for a specific host, click the Add... button to bring up a dialogue in which you can type the host name and then choose to accept or reject &Java; code from that particular host, which will add the domain to the list on the left of the page. + +You can select a host in the list, and click the Change... button to choose a different policy for that host. Clicking the Delete button removes the policy for the selected host; after deletion, the global settings will then apply to that host. You can import policies from a file by clicking the Import... button. To save the current list to a compressed archive file, click the Export... button. + +Finally, the group of controls labelled Java Runtime Settings allows you to set some options for the way in which &Java; should run. These options are useful for diagnosing problems, or if you are a &Java; developer, and should not normally need adjusting. + +If you select the Show Java Console option, &konqueror; will open a console window from which &Java; applications can read and write text. While most &Java; applications will not require such a console, it could be helpful in diagnosing problems with &Java; applications. + +Use TDEIO will cause the JVMto use &kde;'s own TDEIO transports for network connections. + +Use security manager is normally enabled by default. This setting will cause the JVM to run with a Security Manager in place. This will keep applets from being able to read and write to your file system, creating arbitrary sockets, and other actions which could be used to compromise your system. Disable this option at your own risk. You can modify your $HOME/.java.policy file with the &Java; policytool utility to give code downloaded from certain sites more permissions. + +The Shutdown Applet Server when inactive checkbox allows you to save resources by closing the &Java; Applet Server when it is not in use, rather than leaving it running in the background. Leaving this disabled may make &Java; applets start up faster, but it will use system resources when you are not using a &Java; applet. If you enable this, you can set a timeout. + +You can either opt to have &konqueror; automatically detect the &Java; installation on your system, or specify the path to the installation yourself by selecting Use user-specified Java. You may want to choose the latter method, for instance, if you have multiple &Java; installations on your system, and want to specify which one to use. If the &Java; Virtual Machine you are using requires any special startup options, you can type them in the text box labelled Additional Java Arguments. -JavaScript - -Despite the name, JavaScript is not related at all to &Java;. - -The first part of this page works the same as the &Java; page settings. - -The checkboxes under Global Settings allow you to turn JavaScript support on for all web sites by default. You can also select to turn JavaScript on or off for specific hosts. To add a policy for a specific host, click the Add... button to bring up a dialogue in which you can type the host name and then choose to accept or reject JavaScript code from that particular host, which will add the domain to the list on the left of the page. - -You can select a host in the list, and click the Change... button to choose a different policy for that host. Clicking the Delete button removes the policy for the selected host; after deletion, the global settings will then apply to that host. You can import policies from a file by clicking the Import... button. To save the current list to a compressed archive file, click the Export... button. - -The final set of options on this page determine what happens when a page uses JavaScript for specific actions. - -You can individually enable or disable the ability of JavaScript to manipulate your windows by moving, resizing or changing focus. You can also disable JavaScript from changing the status bar text, so that for instance, you can always see where links will take you when clicked.The choices for these options are Allow and Ignore. - -For opening a new window, there is even more control. You can set &konqueror; to Allow all such requests, Ask each time a request is made, or Deny all popup requests. - -The Smart setting will only allow JavaScript popup windows when you have explicitly chosen a link that creates one. +JavaScript + +Despite the name, JavaScript is not related at all to &Java;. + +The first part of this page works the same as the &Java; page settings. + +The checkboxes under Global Settings allow you to turn JavaScript support on for all web sites by default. You can also select to turn JavaScript on or off for specific hosts. To add a policy for a specific host, click the Add... button to bring up a dialogue in which you can type the host name and then choose to accept or reject JavaScript code from that particular host, which will add the domain to the list on the left of the page. + +You can select a host in the list, and click the Change... button to choose a different policy for that host. Clicking the Delete button removes the policy for the selected host; after deletion, the global settings will then apply to that host. You can import policies from a file by clicking the Import... button. To save the current list to a compressed archive file, click the Export... button. + +The final set of options on this page determine what happens when a page uses JavaScript for specific actions. + +You can individually enable or disable the ability of JavaScript to manipulate your windows by moving, resizing or changing focus. You can also disable JavaScript from changing the status bar text, so that for instance, you can always see where links will take you when clicked.The choices for these options are Allow and Ignore. + +For opening a new window, there is even more control. You can set &konqueror; to Allow all such requests, Ask each time a request is made, or Deny all popup requests. + +The Smart setting will only allow JavaScript popup windows when you have explicitly chosen a link that creates one. -Plugins - -The first setting here is Enable Plugins globally. If you disable this checkbox, then &konqueror; will not use any plugins. If you enable it, then any installed and configured plugins that it can find will be used by &konqueror; - -You can also restrict &konqueror; to Only allow HTTP and HTTPS URLs for plugins by checking the box. +Plugins + +The first setting here is Enable Plugins globally. If you disable this checkbox, then &konqueror; will not use any plugins. If you enable it, then any installed and configured plugins that it can find will be used by &konqueror; + +You can also restrict &konqueror; to Only allow HTTP and HTTPS URLs for plugins by checking the box. &nsplugins-kcontrol; diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook index 1e6ada4226a..84d50b0c398 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdehtml/nsplugin.docbook @@ -1,99 +1,43 @@ -&Netscape; Plugins +&Netscape; Plugins -Introduction +Introduction -As &Netscape;'s Navigator has been a web browsing standard for many years, so-called &Netscape; plugins have appeared that allow rich web content. Using those plugins, web sites can contain PDF files, flash animations, video, &etc; With &konqueror;, you can still use these plugins to take advantage of rich web content. +As &Netscape;'s Navigator has been a web browsing standard for many years, so-called &Netscape; plugins have appeared that allow rich web content. Using those plugins, web sites can contain PDF files, flash animations, video, &etc; With &konqueror;, you can still use these plugins to take advantage of rich web content. -&Netscape; plugins should not be confused with &konqueror; plugins. The latter ones specifically extend &konqueror;'s functionality; they are normally not used to display rich web content. +&Netscape; plugins should not be confused with &konqueror; plugins. The latter ones specifically extend &konqueror;'s functionality; they are normally not used to display rich web content. -Scan - -&konqueror; has to know where your &Netscape; plugins are installed. This can be in several places, &ie; you might have system-wide plugins in /opt/netscape/plugins and your personal plugins in $HOME/.netscape/plugins. However, &konqueror; will not automatically use the installed plugins: it first has to scan a list of folders. You can initiate the scan by clicking Scan for new plugins. Alternatively, you can enable Scan for new plugins at &kde; startup so &konqueror; will scan the appropriate folders every time &kde; starts up, to see whether new plugins have been installed. - -Enabling Scan for new plugins at &kde; startup can considerably slow down the startup procedure, and is known to give difficulty on certain installations. Turn this option off if you experience problems. - -To find plugins, &konqueror; will look in the folders specified in the Scan Folders frame. When you use this control module for the first time, this list will already be filled with reasonable paths that should work on most operating systems. If you need to provide a new path, click the New button; then you can either enter the new path in the text edit box to the left, or choose a folder using the file dialogue by clicking the New... button. As scanning the folders can take a little time, you might want to remove folders from the list where you know that no plugins are installed: do this by selecting a folder and clicking Remove. Using the Up and Down buttons you can change the order in which folders will be scanned by moving the selected folder up or down. - -As usual, click Apply to save your changes permanently. +Scan + +&konqueror; has to know where your &Netscape; plugins are installed. This can be in several places, &ie; you might have system-wide plugins in /opt/netscape/plugins and your personal plugins in $HOME/.netscape/plugins. However, &konqueror; will not automatically use the installed plugins: it first has to scan a list of folders. You can initiate the scan by clicking Scan for new plugins. Alternatively, you can enable Scan for new plugins at &kde; startup so &konqueror; will scan the appropriate folders every time &kde; starts up, to see whether new plugins have been installed. + +Enabling Scan for new plugins at &kde; startup can considerably slow down the startup procedure, and is known to give difficulty on certain installations. Turn this option off if you experience problems. + +To find plugins, &konqueror; will look in the folders specified in the Scan Folders frame. When you use this control module for the first time, this list will already be filled with reasonable paths that should work on most operating systems. If you need to provide a new path, click the New button; then you can either enter the new path in the text edit box to the left, or choose a folder using the file dialogue by clicking the New... button. As scanning the folders can take a little time, you might want to remove folders from the list where you know that no plugins are installed: do this by selecting a folder and clicking Remove. Using the Up and Down buttons you can change the order in which folders will be scanned by moving the selected folder up or down. + +As usual, click Apply to save your changes permanently. -Plugins +Plugins -In this tab, you can see a list of the &Netscape; plugins found by &konqueror;, displayed as a tree. Double click on a plugin to fold it out and you'll see that the different mime types this plugin can handle will be displayed as branches. Fold out a mime type to see its info. +In this tab, you can see a list of the &Netscape; plugins found by &konqueror;, displayed as a tree. Double click on a plugin to fold it out and you'll see that the different mime types this plugin can handle will be displayed as branches. Fold out a mime type to see its info. -This tab is mostly for informational purposes. The only configurable option is Use artsdsp to pipe plugin sound through aRts, which is enabled by default. Disable this if you wish plugins to use their own method for sounds, and you have configured &arts; in such a way that third-party applications can do so (for example, by having it exit when idle, or by having it use a custom sound device on modern soundcards which allow this.) +This tab is mostly for informational purposes. The only configurable option is Use artsdsp to pipe plugin sound through aRts, which is enabled by default. Disable this if you wish plugins to use their own method for sounds, and you have configured &arts; in such a way that third-party applications can do so (for example, by having it exit when idle, or by having it use a custom sound device on modern soundcards which allow this.) -Section Author - -This section written by: Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de - -Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk +Section Author + +This section written by: Jost Schenck jost@schenck.de + +Conversion to British English: Malcolm Hunter malcolm.hunter@gmx.co.uk diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook index a54991df318..8c5f5ea55f6 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/tdm/index.docbook @@ -2,504 +2,216 @@ - + ]>
-&Thomas.Tanghus; &Thomas.Tanghus.mail; -&Steffen.Hansen; &Steffen.Hansen.mail; -&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Thomas.Tanghus; &Thomas.Tanghus.mail; +&Steffen.Hansen; &Steffen.Hansen.mail; +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2002-02-13 -3.00.00 +2002-02-13 +3.00.00 -KDE -KControl -TDM configuration -login manager -login +KDE +KControl +TDM configuration +login manager +login -Login Manager - -Using this module, you can configure the &kde; graphical login manager, &tdm;. You can change how the login screen looks, who has access using the login manager and who can shutdown the computer. - -In order to organise all of these options, this module is divided into five sections: Appearance, Font, Background, Sessions, Users and Convenience. - -You can switch between the sections using the tabs at the top of the window. - -If you are not currently logged in as a superuser, you will need to click the Administrator Mode Button. You will then be asked for a superuser password. Entering a correct password will allow you to modify the settings of this module. +Login Manager + +Using this module, you can configure the &kde; graphical login manager, &tdm;. You can change how the login screen looks, who has access using the login manager and who can shutdown the computer. + +In order to organise all of these options, this module is divided into five sections: Appearance, Font, Background, Sessions, Users and Convenience. + +You can switch between the sections using the tabs at the top of the window. + +If you are not currently logged in as a superuser, you will need to click the Administrator Mode Button. You will then be asked for a superuser password. Entering a correct password will allow you to modify the settings of this module. -Appearance +Appearance -From this page you can change the visual appearance of &tdm;, &kde;'s graphical login manager. +From this page you can change the visual appearance of &tdm;, &kde;'s graphical login manager. -The greeting string is the title of the login screen. If the string contains the word HOSTNAME it will be translated to the domainless name of the machine &tdm; is installed on. +The greeting string is the title of the login screen. If the string contains the word HOSTNAME it will be translated to the domainless name of the machine &tdm; is installed on. -You can then choose to show either the current system time, a logo or nothing special in the login box. Make your choice in the radio buttons labelled Logo area. Using the Positions setting, you can choose to either centre the content of the logo area or to position it using fixed coordinates. +You can then choose to show either the current system time, a logo or nothing special in the login box. Make your choice in the radio buttons labelled Logo area. Using the Positions setting, you can choose to either centre the content of the logo area or to position it using fixed coordinates. -If you chose Show logo you can now choose a logo: +If you chose Show logo you can now choose a logo: -Drop an image file on the image button. +Drop an image file on the image button. -Click on the image button and select a new image from the image chooser dialogue. +Click on the image button and select a new image from the image chooser dialogue. -If you do not specify a logo the default $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/kdelogo.png will be displayed. +If you do not specify a logo the default $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/kdelogo.png will be displayed. -While &kde;'s style depends on the settings of the user logged in, the style used by &tdm; can be configured using the GUI Style option. +While &kde;'s style depends on the settings of the user logged in, the style used by &tdm; can be configured using the GUI Style option. -Below that, you have two dropdown boxes to choose the language and the country for your login box. +Below that, you have two dropdown boxes to choose the language and the country for your login box. -Font - -From this section of the module you can change the fonts used in the login window. - -You can select three different font styles from the drop down box (Greeting, Fail, Standard). When you click on the Change font button a dialogue appears from which you can select the new characteristics for the font style. +Font + +From this section of the module you can change the fonts used in the login window. + +You can select three different font styles from the drop down box (Greeting, Fail, Standard). When you click on the Change font button a dialogue appears from which you can select the new characteristics for the font style. -The Greeting font is the font used for the title (Greeting String). +The Greeting font is the font used for the title (Greeting String). -The Fail font is used when a login fails. +The Fail font is used when a login fails. -The Standard font is used in all other places in the login window. +The Standard font is used in all other places in the login window. -An example of each font can be seen in the Example Box. +An example of each font can be seen in the Example Box. -Background +Background -Here you can change the desktop background which will be displayed when a user logs in. You can have a single colour or an image as a background. If you have an image as the background and select centre, the selected background colour will be used around the image if it isn't large enough to cover the entire desktop. +Here you can change the desktop background which will be displayed when a user logs in. You can have a single colour or an image as a background. If you have an image as the background and select centre, the selected background colour will be used around the image if it isn't large enough to cover the entire desktop. -The background colours and effects are controlled by the options on the tab labelled Background and you select a background image and its placement from the options on the tab labelled Wallpaper. +The background colours and effects are controlled by the options on the tab labelled Background and you select a background image and its placement from the options on the tab labelled Wallpaper. -To change the default background colour(s) simply click either of the colour buttons and select a new colour. +To change the default background colour(s) simply click either of the colour buttons and select a new colour. -The dropdown box above the colour buttons provides you with several different blend effects. Choose one from the list, and it will be previewed on the small monitor at the top of the window. Your choices are: +The dropdown box above the colour buttons provides you with several different blend effects. Choose one from the list, and it will be previewed on the small monitor at the top of the window. Your choices are: -Flat -By choosing this mode, you select one colour (using the colour button labelled Colour 1), and the entire background is covered with this one colour. +Flat +By choosing this mode, you select one colour (using the colour button labelled Colour 1), and the entire background is covered with this one colour. -Pattern -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). You then select a pattern by clicking Setup. This opens a new dialogue window, which gives you the opportunity to select a pattern. Simply click once on the pattern of your choice, then click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Background: Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. +Pattern +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). You then select a pattern by clicking Setup. This opens a new dialogue window, which gives you the opportunity to select a pattern. Simply click once on the pattern of your choice, then click on OK, and &kde; will render the pattern you selected using the two colours you selected. For more on patterns, see the section Background: Adding, Removing and Modifying Patterns. -Background Program -By selecting this option, you can have &kde; use an external program to determine the background. This can be any program of your choosing. For more information on this option, see the section entitled Background: Using an external program. +Background Program +By selecting this option, you can have &kde; use an external program to determine the background. This can be any program of your choosing. For more information on this option, see the section entitled Background: Using an external program. -Horizontal Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. +Horizontal Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the left edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 by the time it gets to the right edge of the screen. -Vertical Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the bottom of the screen. +Vertical Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 on the top edge of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the bottom of the screen. -Pyramid Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. +Pyramid Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. -Pipecross Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different then the pyramid gradient. +Pipecross Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 1 in each corner of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 2 as it moves to the centre of the screen. The shape of this gradient is different then the pyramid gradient. -Elliptic Gradient -By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 2 in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 1 as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. +Elliptic Gradient +By choosing this mode, you select two colours (using both colour buttons). &kde; will then start with the colour selected by Colour 2 in the centre of the screen, and slowly transform into the colour selected by Colour 1 as it moves to the edges, in an elliptical pattern. -The setup button is only needed for if you select Background program or Patterns. In these instances, another window will appear to configure the specifics. -Wallpaper -To select a new background image first, click on the Wallpapers tab, then you can either select an image from the drop-down list labelled Wallpaper or select Browse... and select an image file from a file selector. - -The image can be displayed in six different ways: +The setup button is only needed for if you select Background program or Patterns. In these instances, another window will appear to configure the specifics. +Wallpaper +To select a new background image first, click on the Wallpapers tab, then you can either select an image from the drop-down list labelled Wallpaper or select Browse... and select an image file from a file selector. + +The image can be displayed in six different ways: -No wallpaper -No image is displayed. Just the background colours. - +No wallpaper +No image is displayed. Just the background colours. + -Centred -The image will be centred on the screen. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. +Centred +The image will be centred on the screen. The background colours will be present anywhere the image does not cover. -Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. +Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the upper left corner of the screen, and duplicated downward and to the right. -Centre Tiled -The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upward, downward to the right, and to the left. +Centre Tiled +The image will be duplicated until it fills the entire desktop. The first image will be placed in the centre of the screen, and duplicated upward, downward to the right, and to the left. -Centred Maxpect -The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. +Centred Maxpect +The image will be placed in the centre of the screen. It will be scaled to fit the desktop, but it will not change the aspect ratio of the original image. This will provide you with an image that is not distorted. -Scaled -The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit all four corners. +Scaled +The image will be scaled to fit the desktop. It will be stretched to fit all four corners. -Sessions - -Allow to shutdown -Use this dropdown box to choose who is allowed to shut down: +Sessions + +Allow to shutdown +Use this dropdown box to choose who is allowed to shut down: -None: No one can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. You must be logged in, and execute a command. +None: No one can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. You must be logged in, and execute a command. -All: Everyone can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. +All: Everyone can shutdown the computer using &tdm;. -Root only: &tdm; requires that the root password be entered before shutting down the computer. -Console only: The user must be at this console, to shut down the computer. +Root only: &tdm; requires that the root password be entered before shutting down the computer. +Console only: The user must be at this console, to shut down the computer. -Commands -Use these 3 blanks to define the exact shutdown command. -The shutdown command defaults to: - -/sbin/shutdown - -The restart command defaults to: - -/sbin/reboot - -The Console mode (which restarts the computer as a console only terminal) defaults to: - -/sbin/init - -When Show boot options is enabled, &tdm; will on reboot offer you options for the lilo boot manager. For this feature to work, you will need to supply the correct paths to your lilo command and to lilo's map file. +Commands +Use these 3 blanks to define the exact shutdown command. +The shutdown command defaults to: + +/sbin/shutdown + +The restart command defaults to: + +/sbin/reboot + +The Console mode (which restarts the computer as a console only terminal) defaults to: + +/sbin/init + +When Show boot options is enabled, &tdm; will on reboot offer you options for the lilo boot manager. For this feature to work, you will need to supply the correct paths to your lilo command and to lilo's map file. -Session types - -Define which session types should be accessible from the login window. - -For more information on this subject, look at /etc/X11/xdm/Xsession to find your xdm setup files. Also review the xdm man pages, especially under the SESSION PROGRAM section. - -To add a session, type its name in the blank entitled New types, and click Add new. - -To remove a session, select the session from the list and click Remove. +Session types + +Define which session types should be accessible from the login window. + +For more information on this subject, look at /etc/X11/xdm/Xsession to find your xdm setup files. Also review the xdm man pages, especially under the SESSION PROGRAM section. + +To add a session, type its name in the blank entitled New types, and click Add new. + +To remove a session, select the session from the list and click Remove. @@ -507,210 +219,98 @@ -Users +Users -From here you can change the way users are represented in the login window. +From here you can change the way users are represented in the login window. -As you look on this window, you will see three lists (All users, selected users, and no-show users). You also see an image box, and a set of options along the right side of the window. +As you look on this window, you will see three lists (All users, selected users, and no-show users). You also see an image box, and a set of options along the right side of the window. -The first thing you must decide, is if you are going to show users or not. +The first thing you must decide, is if you are going to show users or not. -If you choose to show users, then the login window will show images (which you select), of a list of users. When someone is ready to login, they select their user name/image, enter their password, and they are granted access. +If you choose to show users, then the login window will show images (which you select), of a list of users. When someone is ready to login, they select their user name/image, enter their password, and they are granted access. -If you choose not to show users, then the login window will be more traditional. Users will need to type their username, and password to gain entrance. This is the preferred way if you have many users on this terminal. +If you choose not to show users, then the login window will be more traditional. Users will need to type their username, and password to gain entrance. This is the preferred way if you have many users on this terminal. -To show (and sort) or not to show users +To show (and sort) or not to show users -Along the right edge of the window are two check boxes: +Along the right edge of the window are two check boxes: -If Show users is selected, you have chosen to show images of users, instead of making them type their login name. +If Show users is selected, you have chosen to show images of users, instead of making them type their login name. -If Sort users is selected, then the list of users will be sorted alphabetically in the login window. If unchecked, users will be listed in the same order as they are on this page. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +If Sort users is selected, then the list of users will be sorted alphabetically in the login window. If unchecked, users will be listed in the same order as they are on this page. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -How to determine which users to show and which users to hide +How to determine which users to show and which users to hide -Below the user image box, and above the Show users check box, is a set of two radio buttions: +Below the user image box, and above the Show users check box, is a set of two radio buttions: -Show only selected users: If this option is selected, only the users contained in the list labelled Selected Users, will be displayed in the login window. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -Show all users but no-show users: If this option is selected, all users will be listed, except those users contained in the list entitled No show users. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +Show only selected users: If this option is selected, only the users contained in the list labelled Selected Users, will be displayed in the login window. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. +Show all users but no-show users: If this option is selected, all users will be listed, except those users contained in the list entitled No show users. If Show users is not checked, this has no effect. -Select users +Select users -This page contains three listboxes. The large listbox on the left shows all the users on the system which might be a genuine user. +This page contains three listboxes. The large listbox on the left shows all the users on the system which might be a genuine user. -The top rightmost listbox shows the selected users and the bottom rightmost listbox shows the users we don't want displayed in the login window. +The top rightmost listbox shows the selected users and the bottom rightmost listbox shows the users we don't want displayed in the login window. -To move a user from one listbox to another you click on the username in the listbox and click >> to move the user from the leftmost box the the rightmost box or << to move the user from the rightmost box to the leftmost box. +To move a user from one listbox to another you click on the username in the listbox and click >> to move the user from the leftmost box the the rightmost box or << to move the user from the rightmost box to the leftmost box. -Images - -This section of the manual only applies if Show users is selected. If it is not, this image box has no effect. - -Every user on the system can be represented by a image. The image for the user is kept in a file called $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/$USER.xpm. If the user doesn't have such a file the file $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/default.xpm will be used instead. - -To assign a new image to a user just select the user in one of the listboxes and either drop an imagefile on the image button to the right or click on the image button and select a new image from the image selector. - -If no user is currently selected you will be asked if you want to change the default image. - -The replacement is performed by a &konqueror; process so if the image file already exists you will be prompted by &konqueror; if you want to replace it. If you confirm the image will be replaced - you will not have to press the Apply button. +Images + +This section of the manual only applies if Show users is selected. If it is not, this image box has no effect. + +Every user on the system can be represented by a image. The image for the user is kept in a file called $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/$USER.xpm. If the user doesn't have such a file the file $TDEDIR/share/apps/tdm/pics/users/default.xpm will be used instead. + +To assign a new image to a user just select the user in one of the listboxes and either drop an imagefile on the image button to the right or click on the image button and select a new image from the image selector. + +If no user is currently selected you will be asked if you want to change the default image. + +The replacement is performed by a &konqueror; process so if the image file already exists you will be prompted by &konqueror; if you want to replace it. If you confirm the image will be replaced - you will not have to press the Apply button. -Convenience +Convenience -In the convenience tab you can configure some options that make life easier for lazy people, like auto login or disabling passwords. +In the convenience tab you can configure some options that make life easier for lazy people, like auto login or disabling passwords. -Please think more than twice before using these options. Every option in the convenience tab is well-suited to seriously compromise your system security. Practically, these options are only to be used in a completely non-critical environment, ⪚ a private computer at home. +Please think more than twice before using these options. Every option in the convenience tab is well-suited to seriously compromise your system security. Practically, these options are only to be used in a completely non-critical environment, ⪚ a private computer at home. -Automatic Login - -Automatic login will give anyone access to a certain account on your system without doing any authentication. You can enable it using the option Enable auto-login. - -Automatic login comes in two flavours: truly automatic login acts like you would expect automatic login to, &ie; &tdm; will automatically login without expecting any input from the user. Enable this using the Truly automatic login option. If this option is not enabled, &tdm; will start normally, enabling you to login as any user, and will only perform automatic login if you kill the X server, ⪚ by pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;Backspace. - -You can choose the account to be used for automatic login in the list below. +Automatic Login + +Automatic login will give anyone access to a certain account on your system without doing any authentication. You can enable it using the option Enable auto-login. + +Automatic login comes in two flavours: truly automatic login acts like you would expect automatic login to, &ie; &tdm; will automatically login without expecting any input from the user. Enable this using the Truly automatic login option. If this option is not enabled, &tdm; will start normally, enabling you to login as any user, and will only perform automatic login if you kill the X server, ⪚ by pressing &Ctrl;&Alt;Backspace. + +You can choose the account to be used for automatic login in the list below. -Password-less Login - -Using this feature, you can allow certain users to login without having to provide their password. Enable this feature using the Enable password-less logins option. - -Below this option you will see a list of users for which a password is required, as well as a (by default, empty) list of users that do not need to provide a password. When Enable password-less logins is enabled, you can move users from one list into the other, by selecting them and then clicking the >> and << buttons. - -Again, this option should only be used in a safe environment. If you enable it on a rather public system you should take care that only users with heavy access restrictions are granted password-less login, ⪚ guest. - -The Automatically login after X server crash option allows you to skip the authentication procedure when your X server accidentally crashed. Show previous user will show the name of the last login already entered into the login field in &tdm;. Some site administrators would consider even this a possible security weakness, because potential attackers then know at least one valid login. +Password-less Login + +Using this feature, you can allow certain users to login without having to provide their password. Enable this feature using the Enable password-less logins option. + +Below this option you will see a list of users for which a password is required, as well as a (by default, empty) list of users that do not need to provide a password. When Enable password-less logins is enabled, you can move users from one list into the other, by selecting them and then clicking the >> and << buttons. + +Again, this option should only be used in a safe environment. If you enable it on a rather public system you should take care that only users with heavy access restrictions are granted password-less login, ⪚ guest. + +The Automatically login after X server crash option allows you to skip the authentication procedure when your X server accidentally crashed. Show previous user will show the name of the last login already entered into the login field in &tdm;. Some site administrators would consider even this a possible security weakness, because potential attackers then know at least one valid login. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook index b4194089571..a7731676695 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/twindecoration/index.docbook @@ -2,87 +2,48 @@ - + ]>
-&Rik.Hemsley; &Rik.Hemsley.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Rik.Hemsley; &Rik.Hemsley.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-09-28 -3.2 +2003-09-28 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -twin -window -border -theme -style +KDE +KControl +twin +window +border +theme +style -Window Decoration +Window Decoration -General +General -This module allows you to select a style for the borders around windows. +This module allows you to select a style for the borders around windows. -Each style has a different look, but also a different feel. Some have (sometimes invisible) resize borders all around the edge, which make resizing easier but moving more difficult. Some have no borders on certain edges. One (BII) even has a dynamically sized and positioned title element. +Each style has a different look, but also a different feel. Some have (sometimes invisible) resize borders all around the edge, which make resizing easier but moving more difficult. Some have no borders on certain edges. One (BII) even has a dynamically sized and positioned title element. -You are encouraged to experiment with the different styles until you find one which best suits your pattern of work. +You are encouraged to experiment with the different styles until you find one which best suits your pattern of work. -Choose a window decoration style from the drop down box at the top of the screen to see a preview of it in the lower pane. +Choose a window decoration style from the drop down box at the top of the screen to see a preview of it in the lower pane. -If there are any configurable options for the theme you chose on the first page, they will become available below the preview... +If there are any configurable options for the theme you chose on the first page, they will become available below the preview... + ]>
-Browser Identification +Browser Identification -&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Krishna.Tateneni; &Krishna.Tateneni.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2003-10-12 -3.2 +2003-10-12 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -user agent -browser -identification +KDE +KControl +user agent +browser +identification -Browser Identification +Browser Identification -Introduction +Introduction -When &konqueror; connects to a web site to retrieve information, some basic identifying information is sent to the web site in the form of a User Agent header. +When &konqueror; connects to a web site to retrieve information, some basic identifying information is sent to the web site in the form of a User Agent header. -Because of minor differences in the way that different web browsers function, web sites that rely too much on a single browser may sometimes not display as intended when viewed using another browser. Some web sites are smart enough to examine the contents of the user agent header and incorporate this information in the HTML code so that the content is displayed correctly regardless of the browser used. +Because of minor differences in the way that different web browsers function, web sites that rely too much on a single browser may sometimes not display as intended when viewed using another browser. Some web sites are smart enough to examine the contents of the user agent header and incorporate this information in the HTML code so that the content is displayed correctly regardless of the browser used. -However, you may find that some web sites refuse to function correctly unless you are using a browser recognised as proper by that site. In these cases, you may find it necessary to fool the web site by having &konqueror; report itself to be another browser by means of the user agent header. +However, you may find that some web sites refuse to function correctly unless you are using a browser recognised as proper by that site. In these cases, you may find it necessary to fool the web site by having &konqueror; report itself to be another browser by means of the user agent header. -Use - -In this module you can configure the type of browser that &konqueror; will report itself to be. You can control this information by web site. Usually, the list box that is labeled Site/Domain Specific Identification will be empty, so that &konqueror; will always use its default useragent string. - -You can disable the sending of a user agent entirely, by unchecking the Send identification checkbox. This may cause strange behaviour on some sites, and may even deny you access to some websites, so disable this with caution. - -To configure a new agent binding, press the New... button. Type the name of the server or a domain in the text box at the top of the dialogue that pops up, which is labelled When browsing the following site. - -Note that you can not use the wildcard character * in this text box. However, the string kde.org will match all hosts in the domain kde.org - -After typing the name of the server, type in the identifying string in the next combo box, which is labeled Use the following identity:, or choose a string from the list. If you don't choose a string from the list, you will need to know what a valid string from the browser looks like. For example, you could type Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 4.0). - -In the field labelled Alias (description) you can enter a descriptive name for the configured binding, ⪚ Netscape Navigator 4.75 on Linux for the useragent string Mozilla/4.75 (X11; U; Linux 2.2.14 i686). - -You can click on an existing entry in the Configured agent bindings list, and then modify the contents of the text boxes, followed by clicking Change.... - -The Delete button can be used to delete the selected entry in the list of configured agent bindings. The Delete All will remove all the configured user agent strings. Click the Apply to take your changes in effect. - -You can use the checkboxes at the top of the screen to build a user agent that is uniquely yours, by choosing your own combination of operating system name and version, platform, processor type, and language. - -In all cases, the user agent that is being sent by default is displayed in bold text at the top of the page. +Use + +In this module you can configure the type of browser that &konqueror; will report itself to be. You can control this information by web site. Usually, the list box that is labeled Site/Domain Specific Identification will be empty, so that &konqueror; will always use its default useragent string. + +You can disable the sending of a user agent entirely, by unchecking the Send identification checkbox. This may cause strange behaviour on some sites, and may even deny you access to some websites, so disable this with caution. + +To configure a new agent binding, press the New... button. Type the name of the server or a domain in the text box at the top of the dialogue that pops up, which is labelled When browsing the following site. + +Note that you can not use the wildcard character * in this text box. However, the string kde.org will match all hosts in the domain kde.org + +After typing the name of the server, type in the identifying string in the next combo box, which is labeled Use the following identity:, or choose a string from the list. If you don't choose a string from the list, you will need to know what a valid string from the browser looks like. For example, you could type Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 4.0). + +In the field labelled Alias (description) you can enter a descriptive name for the configured binding, ⪚ Netscape Navigator 4.75 on Linux for the useragent string Mozilla/4.75 (X11; U; Linux 2.2.14 i686). + +You can click on an existing entry in the Configured agent bindings list, and then modify the contents of the text boxes, followed by clicking Change.... + +The Delete button can be used to delete the selected entry in the list of configured agent bindings. The Delete All will remove all the configured user agent strings. Click the Apply to take your changes in effect. + +You can use the checkboxes at the top of the screen to build a user agent that is uniquely yours, by choosing your own combination of operating system name and version, platform, processor type, and language. + +In all cases, the user agent that is being sent by default is displayed in bold text at the top of the page. diff --git a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook index 6812a8d7013..8e49122c52d 100644 --- a/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook +++ b/tde-i18n-en_GB/docs/tdebase/kcontrol/windowmanagement/index.docbook @@ -2,457 +2,221 @@ - + ]>
-&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; -&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; -JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English +&Mike.McBride; &Mike.McBride.mail; +&Jost.Schenck; &Jost.Schenck.mail; +JohnKnight
anarchist_tomato@herzeleid.net
Conversion to British English -2004-05-04 -3.2 +2004-05-04 +3.2 -KDE -KControl -actions -window placement -window size +KDE +KControl +actions +window placement +window size -Window Behaviour - -In the upper part of this control module you can see several tabs: Focus, Actions, Moving and Advanced. In the Focus panel you can configure how windows gain or lose focus, &ie; become active or inactive. Using Actions you can configure how windows react to mouse clicks. Moving allows you to configure how windows move and place themselves when started. The Advanced options cover some specialized options involving moving windows between desktops and window shading. +Window Behaviour + +In the upper part of this control module you can see several tabs: Focus, Actions, Moving and Advanced. In the Focus panel you can configure how windows gain or lose focus, &ie; become active or inactive. Using Actions you can configure how windows react to mouse clicks. Moving allows you to configure how windows move and place themselves when started. The Advanced options cover some specialized options involving moving windows between desktops and window shading. -Please note that the configuration in this module will not take effect if you don't use &kde;'s native window manager, &twin;. If you do use a different window manager, please refer to its documentation for how to customise window behaviour. +Please note that the configuration in this module will not take effect if you don't use &kde;'s native window manager, &twin;. If you do use a different window manager, please refer to its documentation for how to customise window behaviour. -Focus +Focus -The focus of the desktop refers to the window which the user is currently working on. The window with focus is often referred to as the active window. +The focus of the desktop refers to the window which the user is currently working on. The window with focus is often referred to as the active window. -Focus does not necessarily mean the window is the one at the front — this is referred to as raised, and although this is configured here as well, focus and raising of windows are configured independently. +Focus does not necessarily mean the window is the one at the front — this is referred to as raised, and although this is configured here as well, focus and raising of windows are configured independently. -Focus Policy +Focus Policy -There are four methods &kde; can use to determine the current focus: +There are four methods &kde; can use to determine the current focus: -Click to Focus +Click to Focus -A window becomes active when you click into it. +A window becomes active when you click into it. -Focus follows mouse +Focus follows mouse -Moving the mouse pointer actively over a normal window activates it. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will receive the focus, without you having to point the mouse at them explicitly. - -In other window managers, this is sometimes known as Sloppy focus follows mouse. +Moving the mouse pointer actively over a normal window activates it. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will receive the focus, without you having to point the mouse at them explicitly. + +In other window managers, this is sometimes known as Sloppy focus follows mouse. -Focus under mouse +Focus under mouse -The window that happens to be under the mouse pointer becomes active. If the mouse is not over a window (for instance, it's on the desktop) the last window that was under the mouse has focus. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will not receive the focus, you must move the mouse over them to type. +The window that happens to be under the mouse pointer becomes active. If the mouse is not over a window (for instance, it's on the desktop) the last window that was under the mouse has focus. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will not receive the focus, you must move the mouse over them to type. -Focus strictly under mouse +Focus strictly under mouse -Similar to Focus under mouse, but even more strict with its interpretation. Only the window under the mouse pointer is active. If the mouse pointer is not over a window, no window has focus. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will not receive the focus, you must move the mouse over them to type. - -Note that Focus under mouse and Focus strictly under mouse prevent certain features, such as the &Alt; walk-through-windows dialogue, from working properly. +Similar to Focus under mouse, but even more strict with its interpretation. Only the window under the mouse pointer is active. If the mouse pointer is not over a window, no window has focus. New windows such as the mini command line invoked with &Alt;F2 will not receive the focus, you must move the mouse over them to type. + +Note that Focus under mouse and Focus strictly under mouse prevent certain features, such as the &Alt; walk-through-windows dialogue, from working properly. -Once you have determined the focus policy, there are the window raising options. +Once you have determined the focus policy, there are the window raising options. -By placing a mark in front of Auto Raise, &kde; can bring a window to the front if the mouse is over that window for a specified period of time. This is very useful with the Focus follows Mouse option. You can determine the delay by using the slider bar/spin box combination. +By placing a mark in front of Auto Raise, &kde; can bring a window to the front if the mouse is over that window for a specified period of time. This is very useful with the Focus follows Mouse option. You can determine the delay by using the slider bar/spin box combination. -Setting the delay too short will cause a rapid fire changing of windows, which can be quite distracting. Most people will like a delay of 100-300 ms. This is responsive, but it will let you slide over the corners of a window on your way to your destination without bringing that window to the front. +Setting the delay too short will cause a rapid fire changing of windows, which can be quite distracting. Most people will like a delay of 100-300 ms. This is responsive, but it will let you slide over the corners of a window on your way to your destination without bringing that window to the front. -If you do not use Auto Raise, make sure the Click Raise option has a mark in front of it. You will not be happy with both Auto Raise and Click Raise disabled, the net effect is that windows are not raised at all. +If you do not use Auto Raise, make sure the Click Raise option has a mark in front of it. You will not be happy with both Auto Raise and Click Raise disabled, the net effect is that windows are not raised at all. -<guilabel ->Navigation</guilabel -> - -In the Navigation frame you can configure the way switching between applications or desktops using &Alt;Tab or &Ctrl;Tab. - -Switching applications using &Alt; Tab, &ie; holding down &Alt; while repeatedly pressing the Tab key, can take place in &kde; mode or in CDE mode: in &kde; mode you will see a box in the middle of the screen showing you the currently selected application while you are still holding down the &Alt; key. In CDE mode focus goes to each new window as it's selected. - -Next there is an option where you can choose to Traverse windows on all desktops or not. With this enabled, switching windows with &Alt;Tab will show all windows, on all desktops, and take you to the appropriate desktop for the window you select. With it disabled, only windows on your current desktop are selectable with &Alt;Tab, and you must use &Ctrl;Tab to switch to other desktops yourself. - -If you check the Desktop navigation wraps around checkbox, then after you reach the last desktop, pressing Tab again will select the first desktop again. - -Many people name their virtual desktops according to their purpose or some other naming scheme. You may find it convenient to select the Popup desktop name on desktop switch, so you can quickly tell that you've switched to the right one. +<guilabel>Navigation</guilabel> + +In the Navigation frame you can configure the way switching between applications or desktops using &Alt;Tab or &Ctrl;Tab. + +Switching applications using &Alt; Tab, &ie; holding down &Alt; while repeatedly pressing the Tab key, can take place in &kde; mode or in CDE mode: in &kde; mode you will see a box in the middle of the screen showing you the currently selected application while you are still holding down the &Alt; key. In CDE mode focus goes to each new window as it's selected. + +Next there is an option where you can choose to Traverse windows on all desktops or not. With this enabled, switching windows with &Alt;Tab will show all windows, on all desktops, and take you to the appropriate desktop for the window you select. With it disabled, only windows on your current desktop are selectable with &Alt;Tab, and you must use &Ctrl;Tab to switch to other desktops yourself. + +If you check the Desktop navigation wraps around checkbox, then after you reach the last desktop, pressing Tab again will select the first desktop again. + +Many people name their virtual desktops according to their purpose or some other naming scheme. You may find it convenient to select the Popup desktop name on desktop switch, so you can quickly tell that you've switched to the right one. -Actions +Actions -In this panel you can configure what happens to windows when a mouse is clicked on them. This panel is divided into four sections. +In this panel you can configure what happens to windows when a mouse is clicked on them. This panel is divided into four sections. -<guilabel ->Titlebar double-click</guilabel -> - -This section provides a single dropdown box. You can select either Shade, several variations of Maximise or Lower. - -Selecting Maximise causes &kde; to maximise the window whenever you doubleclick on the titlebar. You can further choose to maximise windows only horizontally or only vertically. - -Shade, on the other hand, causes the window to be reduced to simply the titlebar. Double clicking on the titlebar again, restores the window to its normal size. +<guilabel>Titlebar double-click</guilabel> + +This section provides a single dropdown box. You can select either Shade, several variations of Maximise or Lower. + +Selecting Maximise causes &kde; to maximise the window whenever you doubleclick on the titlebar. You can further choose to maximise windows only horizontally or only vertically. + +Shade, on the other hand, causes the window to be reduced to simply the titlebar. Double clicking on the titlebar again, restores the window to its normal size. -You can have windows automatically unshade when you simply place the mouse over their shaded titlebar. Just check the Enable Hover check box in the Advanced tab of this module. This is a great way to reclaim desktop space when you're cutting and pasting between a lot of windows, for example. +You can have windows automatically unshade when you simply place the mouse over their shaded titlebar. Just check the Enable Hover check box in the Advanced tab of this module. This is a great way to reclaim desktop space when you're cutting and pasting between a lot of windows, for example. -<guilabel ->Titlebar & Frame</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Titlebar & Frame</guilabel> -This section allows you to determine what happens when you single click on the titlebar or frame of a window. Notice that you can have different actions associated with the same click depending on whether the window is active or not. +This section allows you to determine what happens when you single click on the titlebar or frame of a window. Notice that you can have different actions associated with the same click depending on whether the window is active or not. -For each combination of mousebuttons, modifiers, Active and Inactive, you can select the most appropriate choice. The actions are as follows: +For each combination of mousebuttons, modifiers, Active and Inactive, you can select the most appropriate choice. The actions are as follows: -Activate +Activate -Make this window active. +Make this window active. -Lower +Lower -Will move this window to the bottom of the display. This will get the window out of the way. +Will move this window to the bottom of the display. This will get the window out of the way. -Nothing +Nothing -Just like it says. Nothing happens. +Just like it says. Nothing happens. -Operations Menu +Operations Menu -Will bring up a small submenu, where you can choose window related commands (&ie; Maximise, Minimise, Close, &etc;). +Will bring up a small submenu, where you can choose window related commands (&ie; Maximise, Minimise, Close, &etc;). -Raise +Raise -Will bring the window to the top of the display. All other windows which overlap with this one, will be hidden below it. +Will bring the window to the top of the display. All other windows which overlap with this one, will be hidden below it. -Toggle Raise and Lower +Toggle Raise and Lower -This will raise windows which are not on top, and lower windows which are already on top. +This will raise windows which are not on top, and lower windows which are already on top. -<guilabel ->Inactive Inner Window</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Inactive Inner Window</guilabel> -This part of the module, allows you to configure what happens when you click on an inactive window, with any of the three mouse buttons. +This part of the module, allows you to configure what happens when you click on an inactive window, with any of the three mouse buttons. -Your choices are as follows: +Your choices are as follows: -Activate, Raise and pass click +Activate, Raise and pass click -This makes the clicked window active, raises it to the top of the display, and passes a mouse click to the application within the window. +This makes the clicked window active, raises it to the top of the display, and passes a mouse click to the application within the window. -Activate and pass click +Activate and pass click -This makes the clicked window active and passes a mouse click to the application within the window. +This makes the clicked window active and passes a mouse click to the application within the window. -Activate +Activate -This simply makes the clicked window active. The mouse click is not passed on to the application within the window. +This simply makes the clicked window active. The mouse click is not passed on to the application within the window. -Activate and Raise +Activate and Raise -This makes the clicked window active and raises the window to the top of the display. The mouse click is not passed on to the application within the window. +This makes the clicked window active and raises the window to the top of the display. The mouse click is not passed on to the application within the window. @@ -460,92 +224,54 @@ -<guilabel ->Inner Window, titlebar and frame</guilabel -> - -This bottom section, allows you to configure additional actions, when a modifier key (by default &Alt;) is pressed, and a mouse click is made on a window. - -Once again, you can select different actions for Left, Middle and Right button clicks. - -Your choices are: +<guilabel>Inner Window, titlebar and frame</guilabel> + +This bottom section, allows you to configure additional actions, when a modifier key (by default &Alt;) is pressed, and a mouse click is made on a window. + +Once again, you can select different actions for Left, Middle and Right button clicks. + +Your choices are: -Lower +Lower -Will move this window to the bottom of the display. This will get the window out of the way. +Will move this window to the bottom of the display. This will get the window out of the way. -Move +Move -Allows you to drag the selected window around the desktop. +Allows you to drag the selected window around the desktop. -Nothing +Nothing -Just like it says. Nothing happens. +Just like it says. Nothing happens. -Raise +Raise -Will bring the window to the top of the display. All other windows which overlap with this one, will be hidden below it. +Will bring the window to the top of the display. All other windows which overlap with this one, will be hidden below it. -Resize +Resize -Allows you to change the size of the selected window. +Allows you to change the size of the selected window. -Toggle Raise and Lower +Toggle Raise and Lower -This will raise windows which are not on top, and lower windows which are already on top. +This will raise windows which are not on top, and lower windows which are already on top. @@ -555,102 +281,55 @@ -<guilabel ->Moving</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Moving</guilabel> -<guilabel ->Windows</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Windows</guilabel> -The options here determine how windows appear on screen when you are moving them. Most of these options exact a price in performance, so if you want to streamline your desktop, you should turn them off. However, if you have a fast computer, they may make your day a little more pleasant, so leave them on. +The options here determine how windows appear on screen when you are moving them. Most of these options exact a price in performance, so if you want to streamline your desktop, you should turn them off. However, if you have a fast computer, they may make your day a little more pleasant, so leave them on. -Display content in moving windows +Display content in moving windows -Enable this option if you want a window's content to be fully shown while moving it, instead of just showing a window skeleton. The result may not be satisfying on slow computers without graphic acceleration. +Enable this option if you want a window's content to be fully shown while moving it, instead of just showing a window skeleton. The result may not be satisfying on slow computers without graphic acceleration. -Display content in resizing windows +Display content in resizing windows -Enable this option if you want a window's content to be shown while resizing it, instead of just showing a window skeleton. The result, again, may not be satisfying on slower computers. +Enable this option if you want a window's content to be shown while resizing it, instead of just showing a window skeleton. The result, again, may not be satisfying on slower computers. -Display window geometry when moving or resizing +Display window geometry when moving or resizing -Enable this option if you want a popup tooltip to tell you the size in pixels of a window as you resize it. +Enable this option if you want a popup tooltip to tell you the size in pixels of a window as you resize it. -Animate minimise and restore +Animate minimise and restore -Enable this option if you want an animation shown when windows are minimised or restored. -With the slider, you can set the speed of the animation. +Enable this option if you want an animation shown when windows are minimised or restored. +With the slider, you can set the speed of the animation. -Allow moving and resizing of maximised windows +Allow moving and resizing of maximised windows -When enabled, this feature activates the border of maximised windows, and allows you to move or resize them just as you can normal windows. +When enabled, this feature activates the border of maximised windows, and allows you to move or resize them just as you can normal windows. -Placement: +Placement: -The placement policy determines where a new window will appear on the desktop. Smart will try to achieve a minimum overlap of windows, Cascade will cascade the windows, and Random will use a random position. Centred will open all new windows in the centre of the screen, and Zero-Cornered will open all windows with their top left corner in the top left corner of the screen. +The placement policy determines where a new window will appear on the desktop. Smart will try to achieve a minimum overlap of windows, Cascade will cascade the windows, and Random will use a random position. Centred will open all new windows in the centre of the screen, and Zero-Cornered will open all windows with their top left corner in the top left corner of the screen. @@ -660,50 +339,32 @@ -<guilabel ->Snap Zones</guilabel -> +<guilabel>Snap Zones</guilabel> -The rest of this page allows you to configure the Snap Zones. These are like a magnetic field along the side of the desktop and each window, which will make windows snap alongside when moved near. +The rest of this page allows you to configure the Snap Zones. These are like a magnetic field along the side of the desktop and each window, which will make windows snap alongside when moved near. -Border snap zone: +Border snap zone: -Here you can set the snap zone for screen borders. Moving a window within the configured distance will make it snap to the edge of the desktop. +Here you can set the snap zone for screen borders. Moving a window within the configured distance will make it snap to the edge of the desktop. -Window snap zone: +Window snap zone: -Here you can set the snap zone for windows. As with screen borders, moving a window near to another will make it snap to the edge as if the windows were magnetised. +Here you can set the snap zone for windows. As with screen borders, moving a window near to another will make it snap to the edge as if the windows were magnetised. -Snap windows only when overlapping +Snap windows only when overlapping -If checked, windows will not snap together if they are only near each other, they must be overlapping, by the configured amount or less. +If checked, windows will not snap together if they are only near each other, they must be overlapping, by the configured amount or less. @@ -712,54 +373,31 @@ -Advanced +Advanced -In the Advanced panel you can do more advanced fine tuning to the window behaviour. +In the Advanced panel you can do more advanced fine tuning to the window behaviour. -Shading +Shading -Animate +Animate -If this option is enabled, shading, or rolling up a window until just the title bar is shown, will be animated. +If this option is enabled, shading, or rolling up a window until just the title bar is shown, will be animated. -Enable hover +Enable hover -If this option is enabled, a shaded window will un-shade automatically when the mouse pointer has been over the title bar for some time. Use the slider to configure the delay un-shading. +If this option is enabled, a shaded window will un-shade automatically when the mouse pointer has been over the title bar for some time. Use the slider to configure the delay un-shading. -Finally, you can configure Active Desktop Borders. If this is enabled, moving the mouse to a screen border will change your desktop. This is useful if you want to drag windows from one desktop to another. - -You can set this option to Disabled, which is the default, to Only when moving windows, or to Always enabled in which case just pushing your mouse against the side of the screen will switch you to a new desktop. +Finally, you can configure Active Desktop Borders. If this is enabled, moving the mouse to a screen border will change your desktop. This is useful if you want to drag windows from one desktop to another. + +You can set this option to Disabled, which is the default, to Only when moving windows, or to Always enabled in which case just pushing your mouse against the side of the screen will switch you to a new desktop. -- cgit v1.2.1